+ All Categories
Home > Documents > Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics &...

Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics &...

Date post: 15-Jul-2020
Category:
Upload: others
View: 1 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
248
Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL ENGINEERING SCHEME OF STUDY AND EXAMINATION I SEMESTER Sl N o Q P CODE Theory Subject Contact Hours/week Exam Duration Scheme of Examination Total Marks Min Marks For Passing Theo ry Prac tical Total End Exam I A Marks Max marks Min Marks 1 9SC01M Applied Mathematics - I 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 2 9EC02E Digital Electronics 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 3 9EC01C Basic Electrical & Electronic Components 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 4 9CP01E English Communication 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 Practicals 5 9EC15P Digital Lab 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60 6 9EC10P Basic Electrical & Electronic Components Lab 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60 7 9IC17P Basic Computer Skills lab 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60 Total 16 18 34 700 290 175 875 360 *NOTE : common for E&C, IC, CS & IS branches
Transcript
Page 1: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Diploma in

ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL ENGINEERING

SCHEME OF STUDY AND EXAMINATION

I SEMESTER

Sl No

Q P CODE Theory Subject

Contact Hours/week

Exam Duration

Scheme of Examination

Total Marks

Min Marks

For Passing

Theory

Practical

Total

End Exam I A

Marks Max marks

Min Marks

1 9SC01M Applied Mathematics - I 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

2 9EC02E Digital Electronics 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

3 9EC01C Basic Electrical & Electronic

Components 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

4 9CP01E English Communication 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

Practicals

5 9EC15P Digital Lab 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

6 9EC10P Basic Electrical & Electronic

Components Lab 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

7 9IC17P Basic Computer Skills lab 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

Total 16 18 34 700 290 175 875 360

*NOTE: common for E&C, IC, CS & IS branches

Page 2: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

II Semester

Sl No

Q P CODE Theory Subject Contact Hours/week Exam

Duration Scheme of

Examination

Total Marks

Min Marks

For Passing

Theory

Practical

Total

End Exam Max marks

Min

Marks

I A Marks

1 9SCO2M Applied Mathematics-II 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

2 9EC22 Semiconductor Devices 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

3 9SC03S Applied Science 5 5 3 100 35 25 125 45

4 9CS01C Programing with 'c' 4 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

Practicals

5 9EC25P Semiconductor Devices Lab

6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

6 9SC10P Applied Science Lab

6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

7 9IC27P C' programming and

Hardware Lab 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

Total 17 18 35 700 290 175 875 360

*NOTE: All the subjects are common for E & C, IC, CS & IS branches

Except 'c' Programing and Hardware lab [EI&CE only]

Page 3: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engg

Third Semester

Scheme of Study and Examination

Sl.

No Q P CODE Subjects

Contact Hrs Exam

Dura-

tion

(Hrs)

Scheme of Examination Total

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

for

Passing Theory Practical Total Max

Min

Marks

I A

Marks

1 9IC31 Analog Circuits 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

2 9IC32 Basic Process

Instrumentation 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

3 9IC33 Digital Electronics &

Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

PRACTICALS

4 9IC34P Analog Circuits Lab ---- 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

5 9IC35P Process Instrumentation

Lab ---- 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

6 9IC36P Signal Conditioners &

Data Converters Lab ---- 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

Total 12 18 30 600 255 150 750 315

Page 4: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engg

Fourth Semester

Scheme of Study and Examination

Sl.

N

o

Q P CODE Subjects

Contact Hrs Exam

Dura-

tion

(Hrs)

Scheme of Examination Total

Max

Marks

Min

Marks for

Passing Theo

ry

Practi

cal Total Max

Min

Marks

I A

Marks

1 9IC41 Electrical and Electronic

Measurements 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

2 9IC42 Micro Controllers & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

3 9IC43 Instrumentation Technology and

communication 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

PRACTICALS

4 9IC44P Electronic. Measurements Lab ---- 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

5 9IC45P Micro Controller Lab ---- 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

6 9IC46P P C B Design & Simulation Lab ---- 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

Total 12 18 30 600 255 150 750 315

Page 5: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engg

Fifth Semester

Scheme of Study and Examination

Q P

Code Subjects

Contact Hrs Exam

Dura-

tion

(Hrs)

Scheme of Examination Total

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

for

Passing Theory Practical Total Max

Min

Marks

I A

Marks

9IC51 Control Systems 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

9IC52 Bio-medical Instrumentation 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

9IC53 Industrial Electronics & PLC 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

PRACTICALS

9IC54P P L C Lab ---- 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

9IC55P Instrumentation CAD Lab ----- 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

9IC56P C A S P Lab ---- 6 6 3 50 25 75 125 60

9IC57P Project Work-I ---- 03 03 -- ---- ---- 25 25 ---

Total 12 21 21 550 230 225 775 315

Page 6: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engg

Sixth Semester

Scheme of Study and Examination

Q P

Code Subjects

Contact Hrs Exam

Dura-

tion

(Hrs)

Scheme of Examination Total

Max

Marks

Min

Marks

for

Passing Theory Practical Total Max

Min

Marks

I A

Marks

9EC61 Basic Management Skills and

Indian Constitution. 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

9IC61 Computer in Process Control 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

9IC62 Advanced Process

Instrumentation 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45

DRAWING / PRACTICALS

9IC63P Industrial Electronics Lab ---- 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

9IC64P Bio Medical Lab ---- 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

9IC65P Project Work ---- 6 6 3 100 50 25 125 60

Total 12 18 30 600 255 150 750 315

Page 7: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engg

List of Equipments Required for I, II, III and IV Semester Labs

1) Analog Circuits Lab

2) Basic Electrical & Electronics Components Lab

3) Signal Conditioners & Data Converters Lab

4) Electronic Measurements Lab

5) Semiconductor Devices Lab

S No Name of the Equipment Quantity

1 C R O 20

2 Signal Generators 20

3 Power Supply (0 -30 V), (+ 12V, – 12 V) 20 each

4 Multimeters (Analog and Digital) 05 each

5 IC Testers 02

6 Ammeters (0 -100 ma, 0 – 25 ma, 0 – 50 ma, 0 – 100 µa) 20 each

7 Voltmeter (0 -10V, 0 – 50V, 0 – 100V) 20 each

8 L C R Meter 05

9 Wattmeter’s 01

10 Decade Resistance Box 10

11 Decade Capacitance Box 10

12 Decade Inductance Box 10

13 Galvanometers 10

Page 8: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engg

List of Equipments Required for I, II ,III and IV Semester Labs

1) Microcontroller Lab

2) P C B Design & Simulation Lab

3) Basic Computer Skills Lab

4) C Programming & Hardware Lab

5) Digital Electronics Lab

S No Name of the Equipment Quantity

1 Interfacing Kit / Modules

a) L E D interface 02

b) Moving Light Display Interface 02

c) Traffic Light Controller Interface 02

d) Stepper Motor Interface 02

e) Buzzer Interface 02

f) 7 Segment Display Interface 02

g) Key Board Interface 02

2 Computers 20

3 Printers 02

4 Microcontroller Kits 05

5 Digital Trainer Kits 10

Page 9: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engg

List of Equipments Required for III Semester Lab

1) Process Instrumentation Lab

S No Name of the Equipment Quantity

01 L V D T Trainer Module 06

02 L D R Trainer Module 06

03 Strain Measurement Trainer Module 06

04 Temperature Measurement Trainer Module 06

05 Level Measurement Module 06

06 Pressure Measurement Module 06

07 PI, PID and PD Controller Modules 06

08 Thermocouple Transducer Setup 06

09 R T D Transducer 06

10 Thermister Transducer Setup 06

Page 10: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engg

List of Equipments Required for V and VI Semester Labs

1) Industrial Electronics Lab

2) Bio Medical Lab

S No Name of the Equipment Quantity

1 C R O 20

2 Signal Generators 20

3 Power Supply (0 -30 V), (+ 12V, – 12 V) 20 each

4 Multimeters (Analog and Digital) 05 each

5 Ammeters (0 -100 ma, 0 – 25 ma, 0 – 50 ma, 0 – 100 µa) 20 each

6 Voltmeter (0 -10V, 0 – 50V, 0 – 100V) 20 each

7 Decade Resistance Box 10

8 Decade Capacitance Box 10

9 DC Motor 01

10 Sphygmomanometer 02

11 Electronic BP Meter 02

12 Clinical Thermometer 02

13 ECG Recorder 01

Demo Modules

1) EEG,

2) EMG

3) Muscle stimulator,

4) Bedside monitor

5) Ultrasound Doppler Blood Flow Meter

6) Ophthalmoscope

01 Each

Page 11: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engg

List of Equipments Required for V & VI Semester Labs

1) P L C Lab

2) Instrumentation Drawing Using CAD

S No Name of the Equipment Quantity

1 Interfacing Kit / Modules

a) Traffic Light Controller 02

b) Water Level Controller 02

c) Conveyer Controller 02

d) Lift Controller 02

2 Computers 20

3 Printers 02

Page 12: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Page 1 of 2

Diploma Programme

FIRST SEMESTER

Common to E&C and EI&C

CONTACT HRS/WEEK---4 TOTAL CONTACT HRS/SEM--64

TIME ALLOCATION

TOPICS HRS

UNIT-1 22

1. BASICS OF ELECTRICITY 7

2. ELECTROSTATICS 7

3. ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 8

UNIT-2 20

4. AC FUNDAMENTALS 6

5. AC CIRCUITS 8

6 TRANSFORMERS 6

UNIT-3 22

7. BATTERIES, RELAYS AND MOTORS 8

8. PASSIVE COMPONENTS 14

TOTAL 64

CONTENTS

1 BASICS OF ELECTRICITY

2 ELECTROSTATICS

3 ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION

4 AC FUNDAMENTALS

5 AC CIRCUITS

Department of Technical Education

SUBJECT :BASICS OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING AND ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS

Electric Current,EMF, Electric Potential,potential difference,

Resistance ,Ohm's law , Specific Resistance, Series and Parallel

Combination of Resistance,Kirchoff's Current and Voltage law

,Power, Energy and units.

Electric charge, Electric field , Electric Flux, Flux Density, Field

Strength,Dielectric, Dielectric constant, Dielectric Strength,

permitivity, Coulomb's laws, Capacitor, Capacitance , charging

and discharging of capacitor .

Faraday's Laws and Lenz's laws ,Flux, MMF,Reluctance

,Permeability ,Self Inductance, Mutual Inductance , Energy stored

in a Inductor , Inductance in Series and parallel, Co-efficient of

coupling, Inductive reactance and Quality Factor .

Pure Resistive , Inductive and Capacitive circuits, R-L, R-C and

R-L-C circuits. Impedance and power factor. Principle of 3-

Phase system & Discuss- Star and Delta connection

Peak value, Cycle, Frequency, TimePeriod , Phase , Phase

difference , RMS value, Average Value ,Form factor, Peak factor.

Page 1 of 2

Page 13: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Page 2 of 2

6 TRANSFORMERS

7 BATTERIES, RELAYS AND MOTORS

8 PASSIVE COMPONENTS

REFERENCE

1 ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY ----- B.L.THERAJA

2 ELEMENTS OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

M.RAJALINGAM & Dr. D.V.PRASAD

Note

For Inductaor Color code refer web site www.educypedia.com

For Resistor and Capacitor Color code refer web site

www.electronics-tutorials.ws

Resistors-- Types , Construction , Color code Applications ,

LDR, VDR and Thermister , Capacitors-- Types , Construction ,

Color code Applications, Inductors-- Types , Costruction , Color

code Applications.

Cells- Types , Battery, Series and parallel combination of cells ,

Lead Acid Battery, Relays -Electromagnetic Relay- Terminology,

Classification, Application. Principle of operation and application

of DC motor, stepper motor, generator

Pinciple of operation of Transformer , EMF equation,turns ratio,

Voltage transformation ratio, losses, Efficiency, Regulation ,

Power transformer, Classification of transformers , Auto

transformer .Isolation transformer, RFT, AFT and pulse

transformer--Applications

Page 2 of 2

Page 14: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Diploma Programme

FIRST SEMESTER

Common to E&C ,EI&C, CS&E & IS&E

No.of Hrs/Wk : 4 Total No. of Hours/Sem: 64

TIME ALLOCATION

UNIT-1 18 Hrs

Number Systems and Codes 10

Logic Gates 5

Logic Families 3

UNIT-2 18 Hrs

Combinational Logic Circuits 18

UNIT-3 28 Hrs

Boolean Algebra 13

Sequential Logic Circuits 15

TOTAL 64

CONTENTS

1 NUMBER SYSTEMS AND CODES

Number systems - Binary, Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal,

Conversions . Arithmetic Operations - 1's & 2's complements. Codes

- BCD, Gray, Excess-3, ASCII & EBCDIC.2 LOGIC GATES

Digital signals , Types of logics , logic gates-Basic gates,truth

table,Universal gates, Mutually exclusive gates ( Ex-OR, Ex-NOR)

3 BOOLEAN ALGEBRA

Boolean: constants, variables & functions , Laws of Boolean

algebra ,De-Morgan's Theorems ,SOP & POS ,Simplification -

Karnaugh's map - Realization.( 4 variables only)

4 COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS

Introduction , Arithmetic Circuits, Adders, & Subtractors, Serial &

Parallel adders , Comparators, Encoders , Decoders , Multiplexers

and DeMultiplexers.

5 SEQUENTIAL LOGIC CIRCUITS

Flip- Flops - Introduction , Triggering Methods , RS, D, T, JK FF ,

MS-JK flip-flop - Applications.

Counters - Introduction , Modulus ,Types , Timing Diagrams -

Applications.

Shift Registers- Introduction , Modes of operation , Ring & Johnson

Counters - Applications .

6 LOGIC FAMILIES

Introduction, Different Families - Characteristics , Comparison and

Interfacing.

Text Books1 Digital Principles & Applications - Floyd

2

Digital Electronics Devices Principles & Applications -A.K. Maini (Willey Eastern

Publications)

Department of Technical Education

SUBJECT : DIGITAL ELECTRONICS-1

Page 15: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

3 Digital Electronics - By A. P. Godse

REFERENCES

1 Digital Principles & Applications - Mavino and Leach

2 Digital Computer Fundamentals- Thomos C Bartee

3 Digital Electronics and Integrated Circuits- R P Jain & M M S Anand

4 Digital Systems- Tocci

Page 16: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Department of Technical Education

All Diploma Courses in Engineering and Technology Streams

First or Second Semester

ENGLISH COMMUNICATION

Contact Hrs./Week: 4 Contact Hrs. / Semester: 64

GOAL: IMPROVEMENT OF ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS OF I OR II SEMESTER

STUDENTS OF DIPLOMA COURSES IN ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGY.

SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES:

1 READING SKILL

The student is able to :

1.1 Understand the difficult words and phrases in the lesson

1.2 Use the words and phrases correctly in his own sentences

1.3 Read the lesson properly without mistakes

1.4 Read the given passage correctly.

2 WRITING SKILL

The student is able to

2.1 Write the answers correctly to the questions on the lessons

2.2 Write personal letters in the proper format without mistakes

2.3 Use words and phrases in his own sentences

2.4 write grammatically correct sentences.

3 PRACTICAL KNOWLEDGE OF GRAMMAR

The student is able to

3.1 Use verbs correctly

3.2 Use various phrases appropriately

3.3 Use interrogatives and negatives

3.4 Convert active voice into passive and vice versa

3.5 Frame questions, question tags and give short form answers correctly

3.6 Use prepositions appropriately

4 COMPREHENSION

4.1 The student is able to read and understand the seen & unseen passages

and answer the questions given

5 CREATING AWARENESS

5.1 The student becomes aware of current environmental issues and

about his responsibilities toward environment factors.

5.2 Awareness about Right to Information Act

Page 17: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

CONTENT

1 TEXT BOOK

“ENGLISH COMMUNICATION FOR POLYTECHNICS” By NITTTR, Chennai and Published by Orient BlackSwan Pvt Ltd, Hyderabad.

2 GRAMMAR

2.1 PARTS OF SPEECH

2.2 COUNTABLE, UNCOUNTABLE AND PROPER; NOUNS

2.3 USE OF SOME, ANY, MUCH, MANY, A LOT OF, ETC.,

2.4 MAIN AND AUXILIARY VERBS

2.5 USES OF TENSES

2.6 ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICE

2.7 INTEROGATIVES

2.8 NEGATIVES

2.9 PREPOSITIONS

3.1 QUESTION TAGS

3.2 USE OF ADVERB TOO

3.3 USING PHRASES IN OWN SENTENCES

3 COMPOSITION & COMPREHENSION

3.1 WRITING RESPONSE TO PICTURE

3.2 STORY FROM GIVEN OUTLINES

3.3 EXPANDING OUTLINES INTO PARAGRAPH

3.4 PARAGRAPH WRITING USING HINTS

3.5 COMPREHENSION OF UNSEEN PASSAGE

3.6 NOTE MAKING

3.7 DEVELOPING NOTES INTO PARAGRAPHS

3.8 SUMMERISING

MONTHLY TESTS

READING AND COMPREHENSION EVALUATION

Page 18: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

BOARD OF TECHNICAL EXAMINATION – KARNATAKA

SUBJECT: APPLIED MATHEMATICS – I

For I- semester

DIPLOMA COURSES OF ALL BRANCHES

Contact hour per week: 04 Contact hour per Semester: 64

UNIT NO. CHAPTER TITLE CONTACT

HR.

ALGEBRA

1 DETERMINANTS 2

2 MATRICES 4

3 BINOMIAL THEOREM 3

4 LOGARITHMS 2

5 VECTOR ALGEBRA 6

TRIGONOMETRY

6 UNITS AND MEASUREMENT OF AN ANGLE 3

7 TRIGONOMETRIC RATIOS OF ACUTE

ANGLE AND STANDARD ANGLES

6

8 TRIGONOMETRIC RATIOS OF ALLIED

ANGLES

4

9 HEIGHTS AND DISTANCES 2

10 COMPOUND ANGLES 4

11 MULTIPLE AND SUB MULTIPLE ANGLE 2

12 TRANSFORMATION FORMULAE 4

13 PROPERTIES AND SOLUTIONS OF

TRIANGLES

4

14 INVERSE TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS 2

ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY

15 BASIC CONCEPTS OF ANALYTICAL

GEOMETRY

6

16 STRAIGHT LINES 6

17 TESTS AND ASSIGNMENTS 4

TOTAL HOUR 64

REFFERENCE BOOKS: 1.Applied Mathematics -I By W.R Neelakanta Sapna Publications.

2. Applied Mathematics -I By Dr. D S Prakash S Chand Publications

3. Text book of mathematics for P U C

Page 19: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

QUESTION PAPER BLUE PRINT

FOR APPLIED MATHEMATICS – I

UN

IT N

O.

HO

UR

Questions

to be set

(2 Marks)

PART- A

Questions

to be set

(5 Marks)

PART- B

Questions

to be set

(5 Marks)

PART- C

Questions

to be set

(5 Marks)

PART- D

1 2 1 1 - -

2 4 1 2 - -

3 3 1 1 - -

4 2 - 1 - -

5 6 2 3 - -

6 3 - - 1 - 7 6 1 - 2 -

8 4 1 - 2 -

9 2 - - 1 -

10 4 1 - 1 -

11 2 1 - 1 -

12 4 1 - 1 -

13 4 1 - 2 -

14 2 1 - 1 -

15 6 1 - - 2

16 6 2 - - 2

TOT

AL

64 15 8 12 04

Questions to

be answered

10 5 8 3

APPLIED – MATHEMATICS – I

Marks No. of Questions No. of Questions

to be set to be Answered

Part A 2 X 10 = 20 15 10

Part B 5 X 05 = 25 08 05

Part C 5 X 08 = 40 12 08

Part D 5 X 03 = 15 04 03

Page 20: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Total = 100

CONTENTS OF APPLIED MATHEMATICS – I

ALGEBRA

UNIT – 1: DETERMINANTS. 2 Hr.

Definition, Order, Expansion of 2nd

& 3rd

order Determinants by means of

examples. Problems on finding unknown quantity in a 2nd

& 3rd

determinant using using

expansion. Solving simultaneous linear equations by determinant method ( Cramer’s

rule). Problems.

UNIT – 2: MATRICES. 4 Hr.

Determinant value of a square matrix. Singular and non singular matrices with

examples. Minor and co factor of an element of a matrix. Adjoint of a matrix. Problems.

Characteristics equations of a square matrix and its roots. Problems. Cayley – Hamilton’s

theorem (statement only). Problems. Find inverse of a matrix using the theorem.

UNIT – 3: BINOMIAL THEOREM. 3 Hr.

Meaning of nCr and its value. Binomial theorem for (x + a)

n, where n ia a positive

integer. Expansion. Finding constant term, co-efficient of xn , particular term and middle

term(s). Problems.

UNIT – 4: LOGARITHEMS. 2 Hr.

Defination of common and natural logarithems. Laws of logarithems. Problems

on laws.

UNIT – 5: VECTOR ALGEBRA. 6 Hr.

Defination of vector. Representation of a vector as a directed line segment.

Magnitude of a vector. Types of vectors. Position vector. Vector can be expressed in

terms of end points of position vector. Addition and subtraction of vector in terms of line

segment. Vector in a plane and vector in a space in terms of unit vector i, j and k

respectively. Product of vectors. Scalar and vector product. Geometrical meaning of

scalar and vector product. Applications of dot(scalar) and cross(vector) product:

Projection of a vector on another vector. Area of parallelogram and area of triangle. Work

done by a force and moment of force

Page 21: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

TRIGONOMETRY

UNIT – 6: UNITS AND MEASUREMENT OF AN ANGLE 3 Hr

Defination of an angle. Systems of unit of an angle. Defination of radian. Radian

is a constant angle. Relation between degree & radian and problems. Derivation of l = rθ

& A = ½ r2θ. Problems.

UNIT –7: TRIGONOMETRIC RATIOS OF AN ACUTE ANGLE. 6 Hr

Defination of Trigonometric ratios in terms of sides of a triangle for an acute

angle. Proof of Trigonometric identities. Trigonometric ratios of standard angles: The

numerical value of trigonometric ratios of standard angles like 00, 30

0, 45

0, 60

0 and 90

0.

Problems.

UNIT – 8: ALLIED ANGLES. 4 Hr.

Angle of any magnitude, sign of the trigonometric ratios. Meaning of allied

angles. Trigonometric ratios of allied angles in terms of θ. Problems. Complimentary

angles and relation between trigonometric ratios of complimentary angles. Problems.

UNIT – 9: HEIGHTS AND DISTANCES. 2 Hr.

Defination of angle of elevation and depression. Problems.

UNIT -10: COMPOUND ANGLES. 3 Hr.

Geometrical proof of Sin( A + B) and Cos(A + B). Find Tan( A + B) using

Sin( A + B) and Cos(A + B). Write the formulae for Sin( A - B), Cos(A - B) and tan( A -

B). Problems.

UNIT -11: MULTIPLE ANGLES. 3 Hr.

Derive ratios of multiple angles of 2A and 3A. Problems. Obtain sub multiple

angle formulae. Problems.

UNIT-12: TRANSFORMATION FORMULAE. 4 Hr.

Express sum or difference of Sine and Cosine of an angles in to product form.

Express product of Sine and Cosine of angles in to sum or difference form. Problems.

Page 22: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

UNIT-13: PROPERTIES AND SOLUTION OF TRIANGLES. 4 Hr.

The relation between sides of a triangle and Sines, Cosines and Tangents of any

angle(Sine rule, Cosine rule and Tangent rule), Projection rule. Half angle formulae in

terms of sides of a triangle. Problems. Problems on solution of triangles (four types).

UNIT- 14: INVERSE TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS. 2 Hr.

Defination. Principle values of inverse trigonometric functions. Derivation of

results like sin-1

x + cos-1

x =Л/2 =tan-1

x + cot-1

x = cosec-1

x + sec-1

x, tan-1

x + tan-1

y = tan-1

Problems.

ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY

UNIT-15: BASIC CONCEPTS OF ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY. 6 Hr.

Defination of a point in a plane, Specification of a point using co-ordinate system.

Points on X-axis and Y-axis. Derivation of distance formula. Problems. Section formulae.

Derivation of co-ordinate of a point which divide the line internally in the given ratio( No

derivation for external division). Mid point formula. Problems. Centroid, area of a

triangle and collinear points. Problems. Locus of a point with respect to a fixed point and

with respect to two fixed points and its equations. Problems.

UNIT-16: STRAIGHT LINES. 6 Hr.

Inclination of a line with horizontal line and its slope. Intercept of a straight line.

Slope of a line parallel to X-axis and Y-axis. Derivation of conditions for two lines to be

parallel and perpendicular. Problems. Derivations equations of straight lines y = mx + c,

y – y1 = m (x – x1 ), y – y1 = (y2 – y1 / x2 – x1 ) (x – x1 ), (x / a ) + (y / b) = 1 and

x cosα + y sinα = P. General equation of a line ax +by + c = 0 and problems. Equation of

lines through a point and parallel or perpendicular to a given line. Problems. Angle

between two lines. Problems. Point of intersection of lines. Equation of a line through the

point of intersection which is parallel or perpendicular to the given line. Problems.

*******************

Page 23: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

GENERAL AND SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

ALGEBRA

UNIT – 1: DETERMINANTS. 2 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

1.1 To understand meaning of determinants and evaluation of 2nd

& 3rd

order

determinants.

1.2 To understand the solution of linear equations by Cramer’s rule.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

1.1.1 Definition of Determinant by means of Algebraic Expression and order in terms of

Rows and Columns.

1.1.2 Evaluate Determinants of 2nd

& 3rd

order --- Problems.

1.1.3 Solve the problems to find unknown quantity in a determinant.

1.2.1 Solve the linear equations of 2 nd

or 3 rd

unknowns using determinants. Problems

UNIT – 2: MATRICES. 4 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

2.1 To understand Minors and co-cofactors, adjoint and inverse of a matrix.

2.2 To know the characteristic equation for 2 x 2 matrix.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

2.1.1 Define singular and non singular square matrix.

2.1.2 Find the minors and cofactors of each elements of matrix

2.1.3 Define adjoint of a square matrix.--- Problems.

2.1.4 Define inverse of a square matrix --- Problems.

2.2.1 Explain characteristic equation of a 2 x 2 matrix and its roots --- Problems.

2.2.2 State Cayley – Hamilton’s theorem for 2nd

order (Statement only) --- Problems.

2.2.3 Apply it to find inverse of the matrix --- Problems.

UNIT – 3: BINOMIAL THEOREM. 3 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

Page 24: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

3.1 To recognise the meaning of nCr & to compute the values

nC0,

nCn,

nC1,

nC2…..

Cr

3.2 To prove nCr =

nCn-r by demonstration.

3.3 To know the statement of (x+a)n for positive integral Index n.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

3.1.1 Meaning of nC r and value of

nCr .

3.2.1 Use of nCr in the expansion (x + a)

n , where n is positive integer.

3.3.1 Expansion of (x + a)n

, where n is positive integer. (only statement).

3.3.2 Solve the problems of the following types

(a) expansion of type (2x +y)6 , (√3 +2)

4, (x

2 – 1/√x )

8

(b) To simplify (√2 +1)

5 + (√2 -1)

5

(c) To find middle term(s)

(d). To find the coefficient of xn and constant terms in (x+a)

n

UNIT – 4: LOGARITHMS 2 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

4.1 To understand logarithm, common logarithm and natural logarithm.

4.2 To comprehend laws of logarithem.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

4.1.1 Define logarithm,common logarithm and natural logarithm.

4.2.1 Derive the laws of logarithm

(a) loga mn = loga m + loga n

(b) loga m/n = loga m - loga n

(c) loga xk

= k loga x

(d) loga b = logc b / logc a (CHANGE OF BASE)

4.2.2 Solve problems on laws of logarithms

UNIT – 5: VECTOR ALGEBRA 6 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

5.1 To understand vectors.

5.2 To understand vector operations.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

5.1.1 Define a vector and represent a vector geometrically.

5.1.2 Name a directed line segment as a vector.

5.1.3 Write different types of vectors.

Page 25: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

5.1.4 Write addition and subtraction of vectors in terms of the segment.

5.1.5 Explain the position vector of a point with reference to a point.

5.1.6 Write the conclusion of difference of two vectors with same initial point as position

vector of a point.

5.1.7 Define vector in a plane and vector in a space in terms of unit vectors

i, j and k respectively.

5.2.1 Write types of vector product (a)Scalar product (b)Vector product

5.2.2 Define scalar product and vector product.

5.2.3 Interpret product of vectors geometrically.

5.2.4 Design the product of vectors to find angle between them and unit vector

5.2.5 Apply product of vectors to find ( i.) projection of a vector on another vector

(ii) Area of triangle and parallelogram (iii) work done by a Force (application of

scalar product) (iv) moment of a force (application of vector product)

TRIGONOMETRY

UNIT – 6: UNIT AND MEASUREMENT OF ANGLE 3 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

6.1 To understand the concept of angle, unit and its measurement.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

6.1.1 Define an angle.

6.1.2 Define a right angle in different systems.

6.1.3 Define radian.

6.1.4 Obtain relations between radian and degree.

6.1.5 Solve problems.

6.1.6 Prove the radian as a constant angle.

6.1.7 Derive l = rө

6.1.8 Derive area of sector = (r2ө ) /2.

6.1.9 Solve related problems.

UNIT – 7: TRIGNOMETRIC RATIOS 4 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

7.1 To understand trigonometric ratios.

7.2 To comprehend trigonometric ratios of standard angles.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

7.1.1 Define trigonometric ratios for an acute angle.

7.1.2 Derive important formulae (identities)

7.1.3 Solve problems using identities.

Page 26: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

7.1.4 Obtain trigonometric ratios of standard angles 0°, 30° , 45° , 60°,90°

7.1.5 Solve problems using standard values.

UNIT – 8: ALLIED ANGLES 4 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

8.1 To understand allied angles of the type ( nπ/2 ± ө).

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

8.1.1 Define positive and negative angles.

8.1.2 Give examples to differentiate positive and negative angles.

8.1.3 Explain trigonometric ratios in different quadrants and assign signs.

8.1.4 Define allied angles in different quadrants.

8.1.5 Write formulae of 90± Ө, 180± Ө, 270± Ө, 360± Ө and (-Ө)

8.1.6 Solve problems on allied angles.

UNIT - 9: HEIGHTS AND DISTANCES 2 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

9.1 To understand the measurement of Heights and Distances using

trigonometry.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

9.1.1 Define angle of elevation and angle of depression.

9.1.2 Define the “Height” and “Distance”

9.1.3 Solve problems on height and distance.

UNIT – 10: COMPOUND ANGLES 3 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

10.1 To understand compound angles.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

10.1.1 Define a compound angle.

10.1.2 Give examples for compound angles.

10.1.3 Derive the formula of sin(A+B) and cos(A+B) geometrically.

10.1.4 Obtain tan(A+B) interms of tanA and tanB using sin(A+B) and

cos(A+B).

10.1.5 Obtain formula for sin(A-B) ,cos(A-B) and tan(A-B).

Page 27: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

10.1.6 Solve the problems on compound angles.

UNIT – 11: MULTIPLE AND SUBMULTIPLE ANGLES. 3 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

11.1 To understand multiple and sub multiple angles.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

11.1.1 Define multiple and submultiple angle with example.

11.1.2 Derive the formulae for trigonometric ratios of 2A and 3A

using compound angle formulae.

11.1.3 Deduce half angle formulae from the ratio of 2A formulae.

11.1.4 Solve problems.

UNIT – 12: TRANSFORMATION FORMULAE 4 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

12.1 To understand transformation formulae.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

12.1.1 Obtain expressions for sinC ± sinD and cosC ± cosD interms of Product of

trigonometric ratios.

12.1.2 Derive expressions for sinAcosB, cosAsinB, cosAcosB and

sinAsinB interms of the sum and difference of trigonometric ratios.

12.1.3 Solve problems.

UNIT – 13: PROPERTIES AND SOLUTIONS OF TRIANGLES 4Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

13.1 To understand the properties of triangles in order to solve them.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

13.1.1 Obtain sine rule ,cosine rule and tangent rule for any angle of a triangle.

13.1.2 Write half angle formulae interms of sides of a triangle (no proof).

13.1.3 Solve simple problems on above rules.

Page 28: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

13.1.4 Find the solution of a a triangle in the following cases when (i) all sides are given

(ii)two sides and included angle is given (iii) two angles and one side is

given.(iv)two sides and non included angle is given.

UNIT – 14: INVERSE TRIGNOMETRIC FUNCTIONS. 2 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

14.1 To understand inverse trigonometric functions.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

14.1.1 Define inverse trigonometric function.

14.1.2 Write principal values of trigonometric functions.

14.1.3 Prove standard results like

1. sinˉ1 x + cos

– 1 x

= tan

–1x

+ cot

–1x

= cosec

–1x

+ sec

–1x

= π/2,

xy

y

1

x tan=y tanx ± tan2. 1-1-1-

14.1.4 Solve the problems on inverse functions.

ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY

UNIT – 15: BASIC CONCEPTS OF POINT AND LOCUS 6 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

15.1 To understand the basic concepts of point and locus.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

15.1.1 Define coordinates in two dimensional space.

15.1.2 Define a point in terms of coordinates.

15.1.3 Obtain equation for the distance between two points in terms of co ordinates.

15.1.4 Solve problems on above formula.

15.1.5 Explain the section of a straight line.

15.1.6 Derive section formula for internal division.

15.1.7 Write section formula for external division.

15.1.8 Write formula for mid point of a line.

15.1.9 Solve problems on internal and external division.

15.1.10 Define locus of a point.

15.1.11 Solve problems on locus of a point.

Page 29: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

UNIT – 16: STRAIGHT LINES 6 Hr

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

16.1 To understand straight lines.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

16.1.1 Define angle of inclination.

16.1.2 Define slope of a straight line.

16.1.3 Define x and y intercepts for straight line.

16.1.4 Write

12

12

1tan

mm

mm

16.1.5 Write angle between two straight lines in terms of

12

12

1tan

mm

mm

16.1.6 Write the conditions for two lines to be parallel and to be perpendicular to each

other.

16.1.7 Solve problems.

16.1.8 Derive the slope-intercept form of an equation of a straight line y = mx + c

16.1.9 Obtain the point – slope form equation to the straight line )( 11 xxmyy

16.1.10 Obtain two point form of the equation to a straight line )( 1

12

121 xx

xx

yyyy

16.1.11 Obtain intercepts form of the equation to a straight line, 1b

y

a

x

16.1.12 Derive the normal form of equation to a straight line,xcos α + ysin α = p

16.1.13 Write the general form of equation to a straight line, ax +by+c=0

16.1.14 Solve problems on different forms of equation.

16.1.15 Solve problems to find an equation of a straight line passing through the given

point and parallel to the given line.

16.1.16 Solve problems to find an equation of a straight line passing through the given

point and perpendicular to the given line.

16.1.17 Solve problems to find an equation of straight line passing through the

intersection of given lines.

16.1.18 Obtain the condition for the intersection of three lines express in general in the

determinant form.

16.1.19 Solve the problems on the above condition.

Page 30: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. First and Second PUC mathematics Text Books of different authors.

2. Text Book of mathematics –I for polytechnic-by different authors

3. Text Book of mathematics-II for polytechnic- by different authors

*******************************************************

BOARD OF TECHNICAL EXAMINATION – KARANATAKA

MODEL QUESTION PAPER Code:

APPLED MATHEMATICS –I ( FOR ALL COURSES)

Time: 3 Hrs Max.m marks:100

NOTE: i) Answer any 10 questions in section A, 5 questions in section B

8 questions in section C, & 3 questions in D

ii) Each question carries 2 marks in section A

ii) Each question carries 5 marks in remaining section

SECTION – A

1. Find x if

1 2 3

4 5 0

7 8 9

x

2. If A = 1 2

3 5

, Find A. adj(A)

3. Find the 5th

term in 83

xx

4. If a

= 2i + 3 j – 2 k and b

= i + 2k, find .a

b

5. If p

= i + J -2k, Find unit vector in the direction of p

6. If sinθ + cosecθ = ½ , find sin2θ + cosec

7. If sec θ = cosec3θ, find θ.

8. Find the value of tan15° without using table or calculator.

9. Show that tan2

=

sin

1 cos

Page 31: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

10. Show that cos17 sin17

tan 28cos17 sin17

11. Show that ( ) ( )

tan2 ( )

A s b s c

s s a

12. Show that 1 1cos ( ) cosx x

13. Find the locus of a point which moves at a equal distances from the axis

14. Find the inclination and Y-intercept of the line √3x + y = 3

15. Find the angle between the lines who’s slopes are √3 and 1/√3

SECTION – B

1. Solve the following equations by cramer’s rule

2x + y = 1, y + 2z = 7 and 3z – 2x =11

2. Find the inverse of the matrix A =

1 2 5

0 1 3

3 1 2

3. Verify Caylay-Hamilton Theorem for the matrix A = 2 1

1 5

4. Find the co-efficient of x18

in

15

2 3ax

x

5. If loga (bc) = x , logb (ac) = y and logc(a b) = z. Show that 1 1 1

11 1 1x y z

6. Find the sin of the angle between the vectors ( 3,2,-1) and ( 2,-1,4)

7. If the position vectors of A, B,C are respectively i + 2j + 3k, 2i + 5j – k and –i + j +2k,

find the area of triangle ABC

8. Find the projection of vector 2i + 3j + 2k on 4i + 5j + 3k

SECTION – C

Page 32: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

1. Circular wheel is rotating at the rate of 450 r.p.m. If the radius of the wheel 70cm, find

the distance covered by a point on the rim in 1 second.

2 Prove that tan sec 1 1 sin

tan sec 1 cos

3. Show that sin 1 cos

2cos1 cos

ecsin

4. Show that sin420°cos390° + cos(- 300°) sin(- 330°) = 1

5. Simplify cos( )sec( ) tan( )

2

sec(2 )sin( )cot( )2

6. The angles of elevation of the top of a tower from the base and top of building are

60° and 45°. The building is 20m high. Find the height of the tower.

7. Prove that sin( )

sin sin

A B

A B

= 0

8. Prove that cos3 sin3

cos sin

A A

A A

= 1 + sin2A

9.Prove that sin sin3 sin5 sin 7

cos cos3 cos5 cos7

A A A A

A A A A

= tan4A

10.In a triangle ABC show that 2 2 2 2

cos 2 cos 2 1 1A B

a b a b

11. Solve the triangle ABC if a = 2 , C = √3 – 1 , B = 120°

12. Prove that 1 1 11 1 12 tan tan 2 tan

8 7 5 4

SECTION – D

1. Find the point on the x-axis which is equidistant form the points (7,6) and (–3,4)

2. Find the co-ordinates of the point of trisection of the median AB of the triangle ABC

whose vertices are A(– 2, 2 ) ,B (– 1, –3 ) and C (5,7)

3. Find the equation of the line passing through (– 2, 6 ) and the sum of intercepts on the

co-ordinate axes is 5.

4. Find the equation of the line perpendicular to 3x – 2y + 1 = 0 and passes through(1,–2).

0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0

Page 33: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Contact hrs/Week: 06 Total Contact Hrs / Sem.: 96

1 Concept of Hardware & Software……………………….. 16 Hrs

2 Word processing………………………………………….. 20 Hrs

3 Spreadsheet and Charts…………………………………… 20 Hrs

4 Dataprocessing……………………………………………………..15 Hrs

5 Presentation……………………………………………….. 10 Hrs

6 Internet Basics……………………………………………. 15Hrs

Total 96 Hrs

1 Identify and understand front panel switches and back panel connectors of

a computer system.

2 Identify and Understand the physical components of computer

3 Execute the DOS Commands - CLS,DIR, Date, Time, Version, MD,CD,RD,Del,

Copy,Ren,Volume; Use of wild characters,Path, Type

4 Calculate the montly expense using Windows utilities. (calculators)

5

6 Create a business or personal letter (MS word)

7 Create a company letterhead

8 Create a simple newsletter

9 Create a memo

10 Create a resume

11 Create an Invitation/Greeting Card

12 Create the cover page of a project report

13 Create a mailmerged letter/Invitation

14 Create a Macro which inserts a picture and formats the text

15 Create a worksheet with 4 columns. Enter 10 records and find the sum

of all columns (MS Excell)

16 Create a report containing the pay details of the employees

17 Create a results sheet containing Candidate's Register No., Name, Marks

for all subjects, Total and result.

Total and result must be calculated as below:

Total is sum of marks in all subjects

Result is Distinction if Total >= 70 %

First Class if Total > = 60 % and < 70 %

Course Content

All Diploma Courses

I Semester

Subject: Basic Computer Skills

Display the computer configuration using windows system tools.

Graded Exercises

Computer Basics

Section -1 (Word Processing & Spread Sheet)

Page 34: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Second Class if Total >= 50 % and < 60 %

Pass if Total >= 35 % and < 50 %

provided the candidate has secured atleast 35 marks in each

subject. Fail otherwise.

18 Create a simple Bar chart to highlight the sales of a company for

3 different periods

19 Create a pie-chart - give legends

20 Create a worksheet importing data from a database and calculate sum of

all the columns

21 Create a Macro which creates a line chart using the data in the worksheet

22 Create a simple table for result processing

23 Design a query table for the same table

24 Design a form to update/modify the table contents

25 Design a report to print the result sheet and marks card for the above table.

26 Create a simple presentation to list simple DOS commands,Hardwares,

Softwares etc.

27 Practice browsing of different sites using search engine

28 Practice Understanding different e-mail services-Outlook, Yahoomail, rediffmail etc.

29 Preparation of power point presentation

30 Practice creating e-mail account, Sending Receiving & Storing of mails

31 Down load any free software from the internet.

Duration: 3 Hrs Max Marks

1 Record

2 one question from computer basics(1 to 5)

3 Writing any two procedure (one from each section) 15*2from each section 10*2

4 Executing one procedure

5 printout/result

6 Viva voce

Total

Text Book: Basic Computer Skills By Dr. M A Jayaram & D S Rajendra Prasad, Sapna Publications

Ref: A Computer Laboratory referral for Diploma & Engineering students

BY: T R Jagadish et.al- Universities Press

General Educational Objectives :

After the completion of the study of this subject students should be able to

1. Recognize the various models of computer system

2. Recognize the various parts, physical components of a computer

3. Understand the cable connections and booting steps

4. Know the various I/O devices

5. Understand the need of Operating System

6. Use the various DOS commands

7. Understand the use of mouse buttons

8. Appreciate working under windows environment

9. Appreciate the use of Windows Explorer

Scheme of Examination

Section -2 (Data processing, presentation & Internet Basics)

Page 35: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

10. Create any document

11. Know to format the document and take a printout

12. Create a worksheet in

13. Use functions and formulas

14. Know to format the worksheet and take a printout

15. Create a database in

16. Create view,form,table,query and report

17. Know to take the printout of the report

18. Create a presentation using Powerpoint

19. Know to Insert Slides into the presentation

20. Understand various slide transitions

21. Demonstrate the slide show

22. Know to print the handouts

23. Understand the basics of Internet

24. Create an e-mail account

25. Know to send and receive mails

26. Use search engine while browsing

27. Use any Kannada Software package

Specific Instructional Objectives:

1 Concepts of Hardware and Software

1.1 Identify the models of computers - Tower, Desktop, Laptop, Palmtop

1.2 Identify and understand front panel switches and back panel connectors of

a computer system.

1.3 Identify and Understand the physical components of computer :

1.3.1 Motherboard (System Board)

1.3.2 Processor chip

1.3.3 Memory

1.3.4 HDD

1.3.5 FDD

1.3.6 CDD(R/W)

1.3.7 SMPS

1.3.8 Ports (Serial,Parallel & USB)

1.3.9 VGA/SVGA/AGP

1.3.10 Sound card

1.3.11 Network Card

1.3.12 MODEM Card (internal and External)

1.3.13 Input devices - Keyboard,Mouse,Scanner,Joystick,Floppy,Compact Disk,etc

1.3.14 Output devices - Monitor, Printer, Plotter, etc.

1.4 Understand the need of an Operating system

1.5 Differences between command line and graphical user interface

1.6 Understand the meaning of the following terms :

1.6.1 Single user single tasking

1.6.2 Single user multi tasking

1.6.3 Multi user multi tasking

1.6.4 Batch processing

1.6.5 Real time Processing

1.6.6 Distributed processing

1.7 Do the connections of the system, switch on and understand the booting steps

1.8 Understand the concept of file and directory, naming rules for files / directories,

types of files

1.9 Basic DOS commands - CLS,DIR, Date, Time, Version, MD,CD,RD,Del,

Page 36: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Copy,Ren,Volume; Use of wild characters,Format,Path, Type

1.10 Getting started with

1.10.1 Windows

1.10.2 Desktop

1.10.3 Icons

1.10.4 Mouse operations - single click, double click, click & drag

1.10.5 Shortcuts

1.10.6 Popup Menus

1.10.7 Start button

1.10.8 Keyboard operations in window

1.10.9 Task Bar

1.10.10 Customizing the desktop

1.11 Exposure to Windows Operating System

1.11.1 Logging on to Windows

1.11.2 Starting and closing a program

1.11.3 Switching between programs,documents

1.11.4 Re-sizing windows - Maximize, Minimize and restore

1.11.5 Find - file, folders, etc.

1.11.6 Run - starting a program using run command

1.11.7 Shutdown - shutdown / restart computer

1.12 Practice Windows Explorer - through My computer, Icon and shortcut entry

1.13 Creating/opening a document

1.14 Understand clipboard concept for copy,cut and paste

1.15 Editing and saving the document in Floppy/ Hard disk

1.16 Study and understand Windows utilities -notepad, wordpad, paint, calculator,etc

1.17

2 Utilities

2.1 WORD PROCESSING

2.1.1

2.1.2 Create a new document - edit, save, close

2.1.3 Page setup (Layout)

2.1.4

2.1.5 Creating documents with Multiple columns

2.1.6 Inserting symbols,file, hyperlink,cliparts and pictures into the document

2.1.7

2.1.8

2.1.9 Creating drawings and charts using drawing toolbar

2.1.10 Creating tables and borders

2.1.11 Creating templates, envelopes & labels

2.1.12 Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)

2.1.13 Taking printout of the document

2.1.14 Mail-merging

2.1.15 Creating Macros and customizing Word

2.1.16 Exiting Word

2.2 SPREADSHEET AND CHARTS

Study and understand Windows system tools - scandisk,backup,system info, winzip, etc

Invoking word application and understand the different parts -

titlebar,Menubar,Toolbar,Scrollbar,Control button, etc

Text formatting - Selection of Fonts, fontsize, alignments, line spacing, paragraph

alignment, indents & tabs

Page formatting - Inserting page numbers, date,time, fields,header and footer,footnote,

comments,etc

Practicing the utilities like find, replace, goto, spell check, grammer check, thesaurus,

wordcount,autotext and autocorrect

Page 37: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

2.2.1

2.2.2 Creating an excel book

2.2.3

2.2.4 Entering data - numeric, text and formula

2.2.5

2.2.6 Formatting rows and columns

2.2.7 Understand Filling series

2.2.8 Selecting cells, rows or columns

2.2.9 Clearing contents and formats of the cells selected

2.2.10 Creating different types of graphs for given data

2.2.11 Formatting charts

2.2.12 Dealing with formulas, functions related with text, logical, mathematical, etc

2.2.13 Manipulating Data - Sorting, filtering, validation, importing & exporting data

2.2.14 Working with windows - Splitting, freezing and setting the print area

2.2.15 Creating an excel report

2.2.16 Printing an excel sheet/part of an excel sheet

2.2.17 Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)

2.2.18 Creating Macros and customizing Excel

2.2.19 Exiting Excel

2.3 DATAPROCESSING

2.3.1

2.3.2 Creating a database,tables,view,forms,query,report,index,etc

2.3.3 Use of wizards to create tables

2.3.4 Create a report and take the printout

2.3.5 Creating Macros and customizing Access

2.3.6 Exiting Access

2.4 PRESENTATION

2.4.1

2.4.2

2.4.3 Opening, saving,closing a presentation

2.4.4

2.4.5 Slide show - manual, auto

2.4.6 Printing handouts

2.4.7 Creating Macros and customizing Powerpoint

2.4.8 Exiting Powerpoint

3 INTERNET

3.1 Understand the meaning of :

3.2

3.3

3.4 Chatting

4 Practice on any Kannada Software Package

WORD PROCESSING

Network,Internet,intranet,internet server, internet browser,Webpage, Website,URL's,

Search engines, http,www,HTML,DHTML and Outlook

Logging on to internet, browsing the net, using search engines, Downloading a file

Creating an E-Mail ID, Sending and Receiving E-Mails, voicemail,video mail, video

conferencing, etc

SAMPLE EXERCISES

Understanding the excel sheet,cell,rows&columns, sheet size, navigating the workbook

Formatting a cell - number, date,time,text, alignment, border, font,pattern, protection, etc.

Starting Access and understanding the concept of data,field, record, table and database

Invoking Powerpoint application and understand - titlebar,Menubar,Toolbar,Scrollbar,control

window, etc

Creating a presentation using auto context wizard, Design Templates and Blank

presentation

Working with slides - Inserting pictures, tables,sound files, outline,slide transitions

Invoking Excel application and understand the different parts - titlebar, Menubar, Toolbar,

Scrollbar, control window, etc

Page 38: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

1. Create a business or personal letter

2. Create a company letterhead

3. Create a simple newsletter

4. Create a memo

5. Create a resume

6. Create an Invitation/Greeting Card

7. Create the cover page of a project report

8. Create a mailmerged letter/Invitation

9. Create a Macro which inserts a picture and formats the text

SPREADSHEET

1. Create a worksheet with 4 columns. Enter 10 records and find the sum

of all columns

2. Create a report containing the pay details of the employees

3. Create a results sheet containing Candidate's Register No., Name, Marks

for all subjects, Total and result.

Total and result must be calculated as below:

Total is sum of marks in all subjects

Result is Distinction if Total >= 70 %

First Class if Total > = 60 % and < 70 %

Second Class if Total >= 50 % and < 60 %

Pass if Total >= 35 % and < 50 %

provided the candidate has secured atleast 35 marks in each

subject. Fail otherwise.

4. Create a simple Bar chart to highlight the sales of a company for

3 different periods

5. Create a pie-chart - give legends

6. Create a worksheet importing data from a database and calculate sum of

all the columns

7. Create a Macro which creates a line chart using the data in the worksheet

DATABASE

1.Create a simple table for result processing

2.Design a query table for the same table

3.Design a form to update/modify the table contents

4.Design a report to print the result sheet and marks card for the above table.

PRESENTATION

1.Create a simple presentation to list simple DOS commands,Hardwares,

Softwares etc.

INTERNET BASICS

1.Practice browsing of different sites using search engine

2.Practice Understanding different e-mail services-Outlook, Yahoomail, rediffmail

etc.

3.Practice creating e-mail account, Sending Receiving & Storing of mails

Page 39: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

All Diploma Courses

I Semester

Subject: Basic Computer Skills

Page 40: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

100

5

10

20

35

10

20

100

Text Book: Basic Computer Skills By Dr. M A Jayaram & D S Rajendra Prasad, Sapna Publications

Ref: A Computer Laboratory referral for Diploma & Engineering students

Scheme of Examination

Page 41: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Identify and understand front panel switches and back panel connectors of

Input devices - Keyboard,Mouse,Scanner,Joystick,Floppy,Compact Disk,etc

Do the connections of the system, switch on and understand the booting steps

Understand the concept of file and directory, naming rules for files / directories,

Page 42: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Practice Windows Explorer - through My computer, Icon and shortcut entry

Study and understand Windows utilities -notepad, wordpad, paint, calculator,etc

Study and understand Windows system tools - scandisk,backup,system info, winzip, etc

Invoking word application and understand the different parts -

titlebar,Menubar,Toolbar,Scrollbar,Control button, etc

Text formatting - Selection of Fonts, fontsize, alignments, line spacing, paragraph

alignment, indents & tabs

Page formatting - Inserting page numbers, date,time, fields,header and footer,footnote,

comments,etc

Practicing the utilities like find, replace, goto, spell check, grammer check, thesaurus,

wordcount,autotext and autocorrect

Page 43: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Dealing with formulas, functions related with text, logical, mathematical, etc

Manipulating Data - Sorting, filtering, validation, importing & exporting data

Network,Internet,intranet,internet server, internet browser,Webpage, Website,URL's,

Search engines, http,www,HTML,DHTML and Outlook

Logging on to internet, browsing the net, using search engines, Downloading a file

Creating an E-Mail ID, Sending and Receiving E-Mails, voicemail,video mail, video

conferencing, etc

Understanding the excel sheet,cell,rows&columns, sheet size, navigating the workbook

Formatting a cell - number, date,time,text, alignment, border, font,pattern, protection, etc.

Starting Access and understanding the concept of data,field, record, table and database

Invoking Powerpoint application and understand - titlebar,Menubar,Toolbar,Scrollbar,control

window, etc

Creating a presentation using auto context wizard, Design Templates and Blank

presentation

Working with slides - Inserting pictures, tables,sound files, outline,slide transitions

Invoking Excel application and understand the different parts - titlebar, Menubar, Toolbar,

Scrollbar, control window, etc

Page 44: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

1. Create a worksheet with 4 columns. Enter 10 records and find the sum

3. Create a results sheet containing Candidate's Register No., Name, Marks

provided the candidate has secured atleast 35 marks in each

6. Create a worksheet importing data from a database and calculate sum of

7. Create a Macro which creates a line chart using the data in the worksheet

4.Design a report to print the result sheet and marks card for the above table.

2.Practice Understanding different e-mail services-Outlook, Yahoomail, rediffmail

Page 45: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

BEEC LAB

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

1

2

GRADED EXERCISES:

1

2

3

4

5

7

8

9

10

11

12

Department of Technical Education

SUBJECT :BASICS OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING AND ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS LAB

Page 1 of 6

Page 46: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

BEEC LAB

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

SECTION

Record

SECTION A (STUDY EXERCISES)

SECTION B (CONDUCTION EXPERIMENTS)

1) Writing the circuit, Tabular column,

Ideal graph, formulae

2) Soldering

3) Conduction

4) Result

Viva-Voce

Total

Page 2 of 6

Page 47: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

BEEC LAB

Diploma Programme

FIRST SEMESTER

Common to E&C ,EI&C , CS&E , ISEGENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of the lab course, the student will be able to

Comprehend the art of Soldering

Understand the behavioral characteristics of passive components

GRADED EXERCISES:

SECTION -- A

STUDY EXERCISES

Contact Hrs

Familiarization and precautionary measures to be taken while using the

following Equipments

1.1 Ammeters, Voltmeters and Galvanometer

1.2 Mulltimeter - Analog and Digital

1.3 D.C. Regulated Power Supply

1.4 CRO

1.5 LCR Meter

Identification of components ----- Passive and Active components with

Symbol, value marking, dimensions, bases etc.

Colour code--- Calculation of Resistance, capacitance and Inductance value

by colour code and letter code method

Testing and Measurement of Passive Components - Resistance, Capacitance and Inductance value by

Meter and comparison by colour codes

Soldering Practice using general purpose PCB

Tools, Bending and Bunching of Wires

Soldering of Passive and Active components,

Familiarization of PCB and SMD mountings

Soldering of Amplifier, Oscillator, Power Supply etc. (circuits to be given by the lecturer)

Study of Transformers - Ratings and Voltage measurement

1) Power Transformers - Step-up, Step-Down

2) Auto Transformer, Isolation transformer, pulse trannsformer

3) Transformers based on frequency

Familiarization and Study following Hardware materials, Symbols and Applications.

FUSES --- Rewirable, cartridge,High rupturing capacity Fuse,

PLUGS AND SOCKETS --- 2 pin, 3 pin.

CONNECTORS : BNC,TNC connectors.

SWITCHES : Toggle , push button , Thumb wheel and Keys.

TERMINALS ---Different sizes

CABLES --- Twistedpair,co-axial cable, flat cable, optical cable

CLIPS & PLUGS --- Crocodile , Banana

Tools used for Electronic Servicing - e.g. for crimping, stripping, cutting, etc.

Study of UPS, Stabilisers.definition and types of UPS(off line and On line)

Study of Different types of Batteries(Tubular and maintainance free) used in Electronic Applications

Note: Above study excersises shall be repeated through the semester during spare time that may be

available while conduction type excersises are carried out.

Study & Testing of Earthing

Lead Acid Batteries: a) Charging b) Testing using cell Tester,Battery Tester & Hydrometer c) Maintainence

& precaution to be taken while using batteries

Department of Technical Education

SUBJECT :BASICS OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING AND ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS LAB

Page 3 of 6

Page 48: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

BEEC LAB

SECTION ---B

CONDUCTION EXPERIMENTS

Verification of Ohms law

Verification of effective resistance of

a) Series Resistance Network

b) Parallel Resistance Network

c)Combination Network

Verification of Kirchoff's Current law for D.C Circuits

Verification of Kirchoff's Voltage law for D.C Circuits

Measurement of Total Inductance Value of Inductors Connected in

a) Series b) Parallel c) Series- Parallel Combination

Measurement of Total Capacitance Value of Capacitors Connected in

a) Series b) Parallel c) Series- Parallel Combination

Measurement of AC Voltage by CRO - Amplitude, Peak to Peak Value, Frequency, Time Period and

Wavelength; phase Difference by lissajous figure

Determination of Switching Characteristics of Relays

a) Non-Polarized b) Reed Relay

Plot the Characteristics of

a) Thermistor b) Light Dependent Resistor c) Voltage Dependent Resistor

Connecting,Starting & running of AC & DC motors used for Electronic Applications,plot the speed v/svtg of DC motor

Lead Acid Batteries: a) Charging b) Testing using cell Tester,Battery Tester & Hydrometer c) Maintainence

& precaution to be taken while using batteries

Mini Project: Individual students or a batch of students should carry out a miniproject throughout the

semester and submit the project report at the end of the semester.

e.g.: 1. Collection of Catologues and Specification sheets,

2. Preparation of a chart displaying photo copies of the following alongwith symbols a) Passive Components

& b) Active Components,

3. PCB Preparation Process

4. Electroninc Hardware materials

Total

Note:The tutors are advised against the use of Spring boards and bread boards.

SECTION

Record

SECTION A (STUDY EXERCISES)

SECTION B (CONDUCTION EXPERIMENTS)

1) Writing the circuit, Tabular column,

Ideal graph, formulae

2) Soldering

3) Conduction

4) Result

Viva-Voce

Total

SCHEME OF VALUATION

Page 4 of 6

Page 49: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

BEEC LAB

96

12

3

3

6

6

6

6

3

3

3

3

Department of Technical Education

SUBJECT :BASICS OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING AND ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS LAB

Page 5 of 6

Page 50: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

BEEC LAB

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

9

3

3

93

Max. Marks

5

15

15

10

25

10

20

100

SCHEME OF VALUATION

Page 6 of 6

Page 51: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Digital Electronics Lab_E&C

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

1

2

A 1

2

B 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19REFERENCES :

Note: Pin diagrams of IC's shall be provided to the students .1

2

3

4

5

SCHEME OF VALUATION

Department of Technical Education

FIRST SEMISTER

Diploma Programme in Electronics and Communication Engineering/ Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engineering

Page 1 of 6

Page 52: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Digital Electronics Lab_E&C

Total

Page 2 of 6

Page 53: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Digital Electronics Lab_E&C

SUBJECT : DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LAB

Common to E&C and IC

Hrs/Week -- 6 Total No. of Hrs. - 96

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion the lab course, the student will be able to

Familiarize with the use of digital ICs , IC TESTER

Understand and comprehend the simple design aspects of digital circuits

LIST OF GRADED EXERCISES

Familiarization of Digital trainer kit, IC tester, Logic pulser, logic probe

Study of IC Manual and familiarization of Ics and IC families

Familiarization of logic gates using Ics

a) 7400 b) 7402 c) 7404 d) 7408 e) 7432 f) 7486

Realization of NOT, OR, AND, NOR, EX-OR and EX-NOR gates using NAND gate

Realization of NOT, OR, AND, NOR, EX-OR and EX-NOR gates using NOR gate

Implementing and verifying Boolean Expression using K-map

Verification of DeMorgan's theorem and realization of the given expression using Demorgan's law

Implementing Half Adder and Full Adder using logic gates

implementing Half Subtractor and Full Subtractor using logic gates

Verification of truth table of Flip-Flop

i ) Clocked RS FF using NAND Gates

ii) JK FF Using IC 7476

iii) T and D FF using IC 7476.

Realize Binary to Gray code converter using IC 7486

Realize Gray to Binary code converter using IC 7486

Realize parity generator and checker using IC 7486

Familiarization of IC 7483 with 4bit addition

Realize 2-bit comparator using logic gates and familiarization of IC 7485

Interface 7 segment display with IC 7447 / 7448 decoder .

Verify the truth table of 1:8 Demultiplexer and 8:1 multiplexer using IC 74138 and 74151respectively

Verify the truth table of priority encoder using IC 74147

Realize and verify the truth table of 4:1 Multiplexer using 2:1 Multiplexer

Verify the truth table of Shift Reigister 7495 ( SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO)

Veirfy the truth table of a) up-down counter using IC- 74193 b) Decade counter using IC-7490

REFERENCES :

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS PRACTICE WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS

R.P.JAIN AND MMS ANAND

Note: Pin diagrams of IC's shall be provided to the students .Record

Write up any Two Experiments (Circuit Diagram,Truth Table Expression)

Conduction any one Experiment

Result

Viva-Voce

SCHEME OF VALUATION

Department of Technical Education

FIRST SEMISTER

Diploma Programme in Electronics and Communication Engineering/ Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engineering

Page 3 of 6

Page 54: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Digital Electronics Lab_E&C

Total

Page 4 of 6

Page 55: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Digital Electronics Lab_E&C

5

30

30

15

20

SCHEME OF VALUATION

Department of Technical Education

FIRST SEMISTER

Diploma Programme in Electronics and Communication Engineering/ Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engineering

Page 5 of 6

Page 56: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Digital Electronics Lab_E&C

100

Page 6 of 6

Page 57: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

ENGLISH COMMUNICATION

TABLE OF SPECIFICATIONS

Sl NO

Ability

Content

Knowledge

Comprehension

Application

Analysis Total

1 Lessons 5 25 10 40

2 Parts of speech 2 02

3 Countable & Uncountable nouns 2 2

4 Use of some, any etc. 6 6

5 Main & Aux. verbs 2 2

6 Uses of Tenses 8 8

7 Voice 4 4

8 Interrogatives 2 2

9 Negatives 2 2

10 Prepositions 4 4

11 Question tags 2 2

12 Use of adverb too 2 2

13 Use of idioms & phrases 4 4

14 Story from outlines 5 5

15 Developing notes into a paragraph 5 5

16 Comprehension of unseen passage 5 5

17 Summarising 5 5

Total 13 32 40 15 100

Page 58: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

GOVERNMENT OF KARNATAKA

BOARD OF TECHNICAL EXAMINATIONS

First/Second SemesterDiploma

APPLIED SCIENCE (COMMON TO ALL COURSES) SUBJECT CODE:

CURRICULAUM contact Hours -5Hrs/week Unit No Name of the chapter No of Hr

01 Units, Dimensions & Measurements 06 Hrs

02 Basics of Dynamics 06 Hrs

03 Basics of Statics 06 Hrs

04 Properties of solids & liquids 10 Hrs

05 Heat & Properties of gases 05Hrs

06 Wave Motion 12 Hrs

07 Physical Optics 12 Hrs

08 Modern Physics 09 Hrs

09 Engg. Chemistry 08 Hrs

Test & Assignments 06 Hrs

TOTAL 80 Hrs

Note: For setting of question paper,

Unit No. 01, 02 and 03 ------------- Section A

Unit No.04, 05 and 06 --------------- Section B

Unit No.07, 08 and 09 ---------------- Section C

Also refer table of specification

Page 59: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

APPLIED SCIENCE (COMMON TO ALL COURSES) SUBJECT CODE:

CONTENTS Unit No 01

Units, Dimensions & Measurements : ( 6 Hrs)

Physical quantity, Fundamental & derived Physical quantities, Unit of physical quantity, systems

of units, fundamental & derived units, S.I units, Basic quantities , their S.I units, & symbols,

supplementary quantities, their S.I units & symbols, Prefixes for multiples & sub multiples with

their symbols, Advantages of S.I units.

Dimensions of a physical quantity examples:- Steps to write dimensions, Dimensional formula

Dimensional equation, Applications of dimensional equation, Limitations

( Disadvantages) of dimensional equations ( analysis).

Measurement:- Principle of vernier, Neat diagram of slide calipers & its parts, Zero error & its

correction, Least count, Reading MSR & VSR (CVD), use of vernier calipers for measurements,

problems on vernier calipers.

Principle of screw & nut ( Micrometer principle ), Neat diagram of screw gauge & its parts,

Zero error, zero correction, Pitch, least count, reading PSR & HSR, use of screw gauge for

measurements, problems on screw gauge.

Unit No 02

Basics of Dynamics ( 6 Hrs)

Recapitulation of equations of motion, Newton’s Ist law of motion, Force, basic forces in motion,

gravitational force, electrostatic force, electromagnetic force, nuclear force, Difference between

strong interaction & weak interaction, Inertia, types of inertia ( inertia of rest, inertia of motion,

inertial of direction ), Momentum, Newton’s IInd

law of motion, measurement of force using

second law, simple problems on F = ma and equations of motion, Impulse of force, Impulse as the

product of force and time, also impulse as the difference of momentum, examples of impulse,

simple problems on impulse, Newtons IIIrd

law of motion and its examples. Law of conservation

of momentum, Statement, proof of this law using Newton’s laws, simple problems

Friction:- Cause of friction, types of friction, static friction, limiting friction, kinetic friction,

rolling friction, sliding friction,, laws of limiting friction ,coefficient of friction advantages and

disadvantages of friction, preventive methods of friction,

Page 60: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Unit No 03

Basics of Statics ( 6 Hrs):-

Scalar & Vector quantities with examples, geometrical representation of a vector, concurrent &

parallel vectors, Resultant, equilibrium & equilibrant of vectors,

Law of parallelogram of vectors:- Statement, explanation, expressions for magnitude & direction

of the resultant of two concurrent vectors, simple problems, resolution of vectors, explanation,

simple problems, Law of triangle of vectors, explanation, converse of law of triangle of vectors,

law of polygon of vectors, explanation.

Lami,s theorem -Explanation, Experiments to verify law of parallelogram of forces, converse of

law of triangle of forces, & Lami’s theorem. Problems on above laws.

Moment of a force, positive & negative moments, parallel forces, Like & unlike parallel

forces, couple, moment of a couple, practical examples of couple, work done by a couple

( equation only), Resultant of two like & unlike parallel forces, condition of equilibrium of

coplanar parallel forces, Experiment to verify the conditions of equilibrium of co-planar parallel

forces. Problems

Unit No 04

Properties of Solids and Liquids ( 10 Hrs):-

Plasticity and Elasticity, examples, Deformation in bodies by the action of external forces,

Stress, Types of stress, Tensile stress, example, Compressive stress, example, Shear stress,

example, Strain, Types of strain, Tensile strain-examples, Volume strain-examples, Shear strain-

examples, Hooke’s Law, Stress-strain graph with explanation.., Elastic co-efficient Modulus of

elasticity, Young’s modulus of elasticity-formula, Bulk modulus of elasticity-Formula, Rigidity

modulus of elasticity-formula, Explanation of factor of safety Compressibility, Poisson’s ratio

,Experiment to determine Young’s modulus of elasticity by Searle’s method, problems.

Properties of Liquids: Liquid thrust, Pressure, Expression for pressure at a point inside a liquid,

simple problems, Cohesion, Adhesion, nature of meniscus and angle of contact – examples,.

Surface Tension-Explanation, formula unit and dimension, practical examples of surface tension,

applications of surface tension,

Factors affecting surface tension, capillarity and its applications, expression for surface tension in

case of capillary rise, Determination of surface tension by capillary rise method, simple problems.

Viscosity- Explanation with example, viscous force, factors affecting viscosity of gasses and

liquids, co-efficient of viscosity , SI unit and dimensions, Experiment to determine co-efficient of

viscosity by Poisulle’s method, Applications of viscosity, simple problems.

Page 61: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Unit No 05

Heat and properties of gases (5 Hrs):-

Heat, temperature, S.I units, difference between heat and temperature, calorie.

Modes of transform of heat:- Conduction, Convection, Radiation examples, good conductors of

heat & insulators, examples, Applications of conduction, convection & radiation.

Specific heat of a substance S.I unit, Heat capacity ( thermal capacity or specific heat capacity

of body)

Boyle’s law, statement & mathematical form, Gay-Lussac’s law Statement and expression,

Charles law, Statement and expression, Absolute (Kelvin) scale of temperature, conversion

formula to Celsius scale from absolute scale,

Perfect gas equation (combined gas equation), Specific heat of gas at constant volume

(Cv ) Specific heat of gas at constant pressure (Cp ), relation between Cp & Cv

[ (i) ratio of specific heat (ii) Meyer’s relation ( no derivation) ]

Thermodynamics Isothermal process, Adiabatic process. Laws of thermodynamics. Problems on

gas laws.

Unit No 06

Wave motion (12 Hrs)

Vibratory motion, periodic motion, definitions of period, frequency, and amplitude for a vibrating

particle, Simple Harmonic Motion, Explanation of SHM(motion of the foot of the

perpendicular),Obtaining expression for displacement, velocity and acceleration of a body

executing SHM,

Wave Motion- Explanation of a wave and wave motion with examples, definitions of wave

velocity, wave period, wave frequency, and wave length, derivation of V = nλ problems. Types of

waves transverse and longitudinal waves with examples, mechanical and non mechanical waves

with examples. Mode of transfer of longitudinal waves

( sound wave) in air. Velocity sound in a gas, Newton’s assumptions and formula Laplace’s

assumptions and corrected formula. Effect of temperature, pressure and humidity on the velocity of

sound, problems. Stationary waves with examples, characteristics of stationary waves.

Resonance. Explanation of free, forced vibrations with examples. Explanation of resonance,

practical examples of resonance. Experiment to determine velocity of sound in air by resonance air

column method. Problems.

Beats, Beat frequency, applications of beats, problems.

Laws of transverse vibrations of stretched strings statements of the laws with relevant formula.

Experiments to determine frequency of the tuning fork using sonometer by

(i)Absolute method and (ii) Comparison method. Problems

Musical note and Noise:- examples , characteristics of musical note.

Acoustics of buildings Echo, Reverberation, Interference, resonance. Reverberation time.

Sabine’s formula and explanation, absorption coefficient of materials. Remedies for defects.

Page 62: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Unit No 07

Physical Optics (12 Hrs)

Introduction to theories of light, Newton’s corpuscular theory, Huygens wave theory,

Maxwell’s electromagnetic theory, Planck’s quantum theory, Dual nature of radiation.

Interference, theory of interference, Amplitude of resultant wave, condition for constructive

interference, condition for destructive interference, condition for sustained interference, Young’s

double slit experiment, expressions for path difference and fringe width, intensity distribution in

interference fringe, simple problem on fringe width & path difference.

Diffraction, classification diffraction, Fresenel’s diffraction, Fraunhoffer diffraction, difference

between them, Huygen’s principal, wave front, diffraction with white light, difference between

Interference and Diffraction, Concept of resolving power of an optical instrument, Rayleigh

criteria, Resolving power of a microscope, and its expressions in terms of wave length, resolving

power of telescope, expression for resolving power of in terms of wave length, simple problems.

Polarisation:-Introduction, experiment to demonstrate the transverse nature of light.

Representation of polarized and un-polarized light. Plane of vibration and plane of polarization.

Methods of producing plane polarized light. Polarization by reflection, Brewster’s law, Brewster’s

angle, formula for refractive index in terms of Brewster’s angle. Polarization by refraction.

Polaroids, uses of polaroids .

Unit No 08

Modern physics (9Hrs)

Methods of electronic emission

Thermo ionic emission, photoelectric emission, field emission, and secondary emission.

Experiment to study photoelectric effect, Experimental results ( four results). Four laws of

photoelectric emission, Einstein’s photoelectric equation.

Photoelectric cells, Photo emissive cells, Photo voltaic cells, Photo conductive cells. Applications

of photo electric cells. Electron microscope Principal of electron microscope, focusing by

magnetic lens, construction and working, uses of electron microscope, Atomic forced microscope

simple working of atomic forced microscope, advantages of atomic forced microscope over

electron microscope

Scattering of light:- Coherent scattering and incoherent scattering. Explanation of scattering.

Blue color of the sky. Blue color of water. Red color of sun during sun rise and sun set. White

color of clouds. Raman effect. Applications of Raman effect .

Lasers:- Induced absorption, spontaneous emission, stimulated emission. Principal of laser,

population inversion, optical pumping. Properties of lasers. Applications of lasers.

Radio activity:- Introduction, experiment to demonstrate three types of radiations. Properties

of three types of radiations. Applications of radio activity in the field of agriculture, medicine,

biology and geology.

Page 63: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Unit No 09

Engineering chemistry (8 Hrs)

Pollution:- Air pollution, air pollutants ( SO2 , H2S,HF,NO2, CO, dust), harmful effects. Acid

rain and its effects ( basic ideas). Other effects of air pollution, Green house effect, global

warming, effects of global warming, basic ideas, ozone layer, importance , causes of depletion of

ozone layers (no equation). Effects of ozone layer depletion control of air pollution

Water pollution, causes ( sewage, effluents, algae, micro organisms), their harmful effects. Their

control. Sewage problem and disposals

Corrosion, electrochemical theory of corrosion, formation of galvanic cells, concentration cells.

Methods of prevention of corrosion-Alloying, surfaced coating, galvanizing , electroplating,

anodizing, cathodic protection.

PH

of a solution, water as weak electrolyte, Hydrogen ions, hydroxyl ions. Acidic solution, basic

solution and neutral solution, concentration of H+ ions. Ionic product of pure of water, ionic

product of acidic, basic and neutral solution. PH

scale. PH

for neutral acidic and basic solution, PH

values of some important solutions. Applications of PH

Page 64: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

First/Second Semister

Subject:APPLIED SCIENCE

code no:

Contact Hours:05Hrs/week Contact Hrs/Semister:80

Unit No.01 UNITS,DIMENSIONS AND MEASUREMENTS (6 Hrs)

GENERAL OBJECTIVES

1.1 To understand the concept of Physical Quantities and their units.

1.2 To understand the characteristics of different physical quantities.

1.3 To use appropriate measuring instruments

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVESS

1.1.1 Define a physical quantity

1.1.2 Distinguish between fundamental and derived physical quantity.

1.1.3 Define unit of a physical quantity.

1.1.4 List different system of units.

1.1.5 List the fundamental units .

1.1.6 List the derived units.

1.1.7 Define S.I units.

1.1.8 List the basic quantities.

1.1.9 Write the basic units and symbols for them.

1.1.10 List the supplementary units and symbols for them.

1.1.11 Write the supplementary units and symbols for them.

1.1.12 Write the prefix for multiples and submultiples in S.I system.

1.1.13 State the advantages of S.I units.

1.2.1 Define dimensions of physical quantity.

1.2.2 Write the examples of dimensions of physical quantities.

1.2.3 State the steps used for writing the dimension of a physical quantity.

1.2.4 Define dimensional equation (dimensional formula) for a physical quantity.

1.2.5 State the advantages of dimensional equation.

1.2.6 State the disadvantages (limitations) of dimensional equation.

1.3.1 Define measurement

1.3.2 List the instruments used to measure accurately.

1.3.3 Define the Least Count of measuring instruments.

1.3.4 Define principle of vernier.

1.3.5 Identify the parts of a slide calipers.

1.3.6 Explain about zero error and its correction in the case of slide calipers.

1.3.7 Define least count of vernier calipers.

1.3.8 Describe the measurement of MSR and VSR (CVD).

1.3.9 State the uses of vernier calipers

1.3.10 Solve measurement problems on vernier calipers.

1.3.11 Define principle of screw and nut (micrometer principle). .

1.3.12 Identify the parts of screw gauge and label its parts.

Page 65: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

1.3.13 Explain for writing zero error and zero correction

1.3.14 Define pitch of a screw

1.3.15 Define least count of a screw gauge

1.3.16 Explain measurement of PSR and HSR for screw gauge.

1.3.17 Solve measurement problems on screw gauge..

Unit No.02 BASICS OF DYNAMICS 06 Hrs

GENERAL OBJECTIVES

2.1 To revise equation of motion learnt in high school classes and to apply them to

Solve problems.

2.2 To comprehend Newton’s laws of motion.

2.3 To understand friction.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

2.1.1 Review four equations of motion

2.1.2 State the meaning of the quantities involved in equations

2.1.3 Solve problems on equations of motion

2.2.1 State Newton’s First law

2.2.2 Define force

2.2.3 Define gravitational force.

2.2.4 Define electrostatic force.

2.2.5 Define electromagnetic force.

2.2.6 Define nuclear force.

2.2.7 Differentiate between strong and weak interaction.

2.2.8 Define inertia.

2.2.9 Define intertia of rest.

2.2.10 Give examples for inertia of rest.

2.2.11 Define inertia of motion.

2.2.12 Give examples of inertia of motion.

2.2.13 Define inertia of direction.

2.2.14 Give examples of inertia of direction.

2.2.15 Define momentum.

2.2.16 State Newton’s Second law of motion.

2.2.17 Review F= ma

2.2.18 Solve problems on F= ma

2.2.19 Define impulse as a product of force and time.

2.2.20 Write S.I unit and dimensions of impulse.

2.2.21 Obtain impulse as a difference of momentum.

2.2.22 Write examples for impulse.

2.2.23 Solve problems on impulse.

2.2.24 State Newton’s Third law

2.2.25 Give examples for Third law.

2.2.26 State law of conservation of momentum.

2.2.27 Prove the law of conservation of momentum using Newton’s laws.

2.2.28 Solve simple problems.

2.3.1 Define friction.

2.3.2 Point out the causes of friction.

Page 66: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

2.3.3 List the types of friction.

2.3.4 Define static friction.

2.3.5 Define limiting friction.

2.3.6 Define kinetic friction.

2.3.7 Define rolling friction.

2.3.8 Define sliding friction.

2.3.9 State four laws of limiting friction.

2.3.10 Define coefficient of friction.

2.3.11 Write the advantages of friction.

2.3.12 Write the disadvantages of friction.

2.3.13 Discuss the preventive method of friction.

Unit No. 03 BASICS OF STATICS 06 Hrs

GENERAL OBJECTIVES

3.1 To understand the composition, resolution and equilibrium of vectors.

3.2 To understand moment of a force , couple and parallel coplanar forces.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

3.1.1 Define a scalar quantity with examples.

3.1.2 Define a vector quantity with examples.

3.1.3 Represent a vector quantity geometrically.

3.1.4 Define concurrent and nonconcurrent vectors.

3.1.5 Define resultant of a two or more concurrent vectors (forces).

3.1.6 Define equilibrium of vectors.

3.1.7 Define equilibrant.

3.1.8 Write the relation between resultant and equilibrant .

3.1.9 State and explain the law of parallelogram of vectors.

3.1.10 Obtain expressions for the magnitude and direction of the resultant of two vectors acting at

a point.

3.1.11 Explain resolution of vectors.

3.1.12 Solve problems on parallelogram law and resolution of vectors.

3.1.13 State and explain the converse of the law of triangle of vectors.

3.1.14 State and explain the law of polygon of vectors.

3.1.15 State and explain Lami’s theorem .

3.1.16 Describe experiments to verify the law of parallelogram of vectors and the converse of the

law of triangle of vectors and Lami’s theorem.

3.1.17 Solve problems on law of triangle of vectors,Lami’s theorem.

3.2.1 Define moment of force.

3.2.2 Write S I unit and dimensions of it.

3.2.3 Define positive and negative moment of force.

3.2.4 Define couple and moment of a couple.

3.2.5 Write practical applications of couple.

3.2.6 Define like and unlike parallel forces.

3.2.7 Explain the resultant of like parallel forces.

3.2.8 Explain the resultant of unlike parallel forces.

Page 67: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

3.2.9 Explain the condition of equilibrium of number of coplanar parallel forces.

3.2.10 Describe an experiment to verify the conditions of equilibrium of parallel coplanar forces.

3.2.11 Solve problems on parallel forces.

Unit No.04 PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS AND LIQUIDS 10 Hrs

GENERAL OBJECTIVES

4.1 To understand the properties of solids.

4.2 To understand the properties of liquids.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

4.1.1 Explain solid as a state of matter.

4.1.2 Explain meaning of “deformation “ with examples.

4.1.3 Define elasticity with examples.

4.1.4 Explain the meaning of elastic limit.

4.1.5 Define plasticity with examples.

4.1.6 Define stress.

4.1.7 Write S.I unit and dimensions of stress.

4.1.8 Define Tensile stress with examples.

4.1.9 Define Volume stress with examples.

4.1.10 Define Shear stress with examples.

4.1.11 Define strain.

4.1.12 Define Tensile strain with examples.

4.1.13 Define Volume strain with examples.

4.1.14 Define Shear strain with examples.

4.1.15 State Hooke’s law.

4.1.16 Explain limitations of Hooke’s law.

4.1.17 Draw stress versus strain graph.

4.1.18 Explain the features of the graph.

4.1.19 Define coefficient of elasticity,(Modulus of elasticity)

4.1.20 Write formula of modulus of elasticity.

4.1.21 Define Young’s modulus and write its formula.

4.1.22 Write its S.I unit and dimensions.

4.1.23 Define Bulk modulus and write its formula .Write its SI unit and dimensions.

4.1.24 Define Rigidity modulus and write its formula.

4.1.25 Write its SI unit and dimensions.

4.1.26 Define factor of safety.

4.1.27 Write its formula.

4.1.28 Describe an experiment to determine Young’s modulus of a material using Searle’s

apparatus.

4.1.29 Solve problems.

4.2.1 Explain liquid as a state of matter.

4.2.2 Define Thrust and write its SI unit.

4.2.3 Define pressure and write its SI unit.

4.2.4 Derive an expression for the pressure at a point inside a liquid at rest.

4.2.5 Solve problems.

4.2.6 Define adhesive forces with example.

Page 68: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

4.2.7 Define cohesive forces with an example.

4.2.8 Explain the nature of meniscus with examples.

4.2.9 Define angle of contact with examples.

4.2.10 Explain surface tension on the basis of molecular theory.

4.2.11 Define surface tension.

4.2.12 Write the formula,SI unit and dimensions of it.

4.2.13 Give examples for the existence of surface tension.

4.2.14 Explain the factors affecting the surface tension.

4.2.15 Write the applications of surface tension.

4.2.16 Define capillary rise and capillarity.

4.2.17 Obtain an equation for surface tension in case of capillary rise.

4.2.18 Describe an experiment to determine surface tension of water by capillary rise method.

4.2.19 Solve problems.

4.2.20 Explain the concept of friction in a liquid flow

4.2.21 Explain viscous force.

4.2.22 Define viscosity.

4.2.23 Explain the factors affecting viscous force.

4.2.24 Define coefficient of viscosity.

4.2.25 Write SI unit and dimensions of coefficient of viscosity.

4.2.26 Discuss the effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.

4.2.27 List the applications of viscosity.

4.2.28 Describe an experiment to determine viscosity of water by poissulle’s method.

Unit No.05 HEAT AND PROPERTIES OF GASES 05Hrs

GENERAL OBJECTIVES

5.1 To understand Heat and Temperature.

5.2 To study modes and Transmission of heat and their applications.

5.3 To study the specific heat of a substances.

5.4 To study gas laws and specific heat of gas.

5.5 To understand laws of Thermodynamics.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

5.1.1 Define heat.

5.1.2 List the sources of heat.

5.1.3 Define temperature.

5.1.4 Explain different scales of temperature.

5.1.5 Write the differences between heat and temperature.

5.1.6 Define calorie.

5.1.7 Define SI unit of heat - joule.

5.2.1 List the different modes of transmission of heat.

5.2.2 Define conduction.

5.2.3 List the applications of conduction.

5.2.4 Define good conductors of heat and insulators.

5.2.5 List the uses of good conductors and insulators,

5.2.6 Define convection.

Page 69: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

5.2.7 Explain two types of convection.

5.2.8 List the applications of convection.

5.2.9 Define radiation.

5.2.10 List the applications of radiation.

5.3.1 Define and explain specific heat of substance.

5.3.2 Obtain the equation for specific heat of substance and write its SI unit.

5.3.3 List the values for specific heats of few materials commonly used.

5.3.4 Solve simple numerical problems on equation for specific heat.

5.4.1 State Boyle’s law.

5.4.2 Write the expressions of Boyle’s law.

5.4.3 State Charle’s law and write its mathematical expression.

5.4.4 State Gay-Lussac’s law and write its mathematical expression.

5.4.5 Explain the Absolute scale of temperature on the basis of Charle’s law ,give its graphical

representation.

5.4.6 Obtain combined gas equation and perfect gas equation.

5.4.7 Solve problems

5.4.8 Define specific heat of a gas at constant volume( Cv).

5.4.9 Define specific heat of a gas at constant pressure (Cp).

5.4.10 Write the relation between Cp and Cv ( i)ratio of specific heat. (ii) Meyer’s relation ( no

derivation.)

5.5.1 Define Isothermal process and Adiabatic process with reference to gas.

5.5.2 State First law of thermodynamics.

5.5.3 Write the mathematical expression of First law of thermodynamics.

5.5.4 State the Second law of thermodynamics.

5.5.5 List the application of Second law of thermodynamics.

Unit No.06 WAVE MOTION 12 Hrs

GNERAL OBJECTIVES

6.1 To understand Simple Hormonic Motion.

6.2 To understand wave motion.

6.3 To understand stationary waves ,resonance and beats.

6.4 To study transverse vibrations of stretched strings.

6.5 To know musical note and noise.

6.6 To study acoustics of buildings.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

6.1.1 Define vibratory motion with examples.

6.1.2 Define periodic motion with examples.

6.1.3 Explain and define Simple Hormonic Motion.

6.1.4 Obtain an expression for displacement,velocity and acceleration or a particle executing

SHM

6.1.5 Define period,frequency,amplitude in the case of vibrating particle.

6.2.1 Explain wave and wave motion with example.

6.2.2 Explain mechanical waves and electromagnetic waves with examples.

6.2.3 Define transverse waves with example.

Page 70: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

6.2.4 Define longitudinal waves with example.

6.2.5 List the differences between transverse waves and longitudinal waves.

6.2.6 Define wave frequency,wave period,wave length,wave velocity,wave amplitude for a

wave.

6.2.7 Derive the relation V=nλ

6.2.8 Solve problems on the relation.

6.2.9 Explain propagation of sound in air.

6.2.10 Explain Newton’s assumptions for the velocity of sound in air (gas) and write formula.

6.2.11 Explain Laplace’s assumption for velocity of sound in air.

6.2.12 Write Newton - Laplace formula for the velocity of sound in a gas.

6.2.13 Discuss the effect of pressure ,temperature, humidity on the velocity of sound.

6.2.14 Solve problems on Newton - Laplace formula.

6.3.1 Define stationary waves.

6.3.2 List the characteristics of stationary waves.

6.3.3 Define free vibrations with examples.

6.3.4 Define forced vibrations with examples.

6.3.5 Define resonance with examples.

6.3.6 Describe an experiment to determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature and

zero degree celsius by resonance air column method.

6.3.7 Solve problems.

6.3.8 Define beats,beat frequency.

6.3.9 State applications of beats. Solve problems.

6.4.1 Explain the transverse vibrations of stretched strings.

6.4.2 State the three laws of transverse vibration of stretched strings with relevant formula.

6.4.3 Describe an experiment to determine the frequency of tuning fork by comparison method

using sonometer.

6.4.4 Describe an experiment to determine the frequency of tuning fork by absolute method

using sonometer.

6.4.5 Solve problems.

6.5.1 Define musical note,noise.

6.5.2 List the differences between musical note and noise.

6.5.3 List the characteristics of musical note.

6.6.1 Explain acoustics with regards to buildings.

6.6,2 List the different types of defects of acoustics in buildings.

6.6.3 Define Echo,Reverberation,Intereference,Resonance.

6.6.4 Define Reverberation time.

6.6.5 Define absorptive coefficients of materials.

6.6.6 Write Sabine’s formula and explain the notations.

6.6.7 List the different remedies for defects.

6.6.8 Solve problems on Sabine’s formula.

Unit No.07 PHYSICAL OPTICS 12Hrs

GENERAL OBJECTIVES

7.1 To understand various theories of light.

7.2 To understand the concept of Interference.

7.3 To understand the concept of Diffraction .

7.4 To understand the concept of Polarisation.

Page 71: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

7.1.1 Explain Newton’s corpuscular theory.

7.1.2 Explain Huygen’s wave theory.

7.1.3 Explain Maxwell’s Electromagnetic theory.

7.1.4 Explain Planck’s quantum theory.

7.1.5 Explain dual nature of radiation (light).

7.2.1 Define interference.

7.2.2 Obtain the equation for resultant displacement.

7.2.3 Derive the equation for amplitude of the resultant wave.

7.2.4 Discuss the conditions for constructive interference.

7.2.5 Discuss the conditions for destructive interference.

7.2.6 List the conditions of sustained interference.

7.2.7 Explain Young’s double slit experiment.

7.2.8 Obtain expression for path difference.

7.2.9 Obtain expression for fringe width.

7.2.10 Explain the intensity distribution in interference fringe.

7.2.11 Solve simple problems on fringewidth and path difference.

7.3.1 Define diffraction.

7.3.2 Define Fresenel diffraction and Fraunhoffer diffraction.

7.3.3 Differentiate Fresenel diffraction and Fraunhoffer diffraction.

7.3.4 Explain Huygen’s principle related to wavefront.

7.3.5 Explain diffraction with white light.

7.3.6 Differentiate between interference and diffraction.

7.3.7 Explain the concept of resolving power of an optical instrument.

7.3.8 Explain Rayleigh’s criteria on resolving power.

7.3.9 Define limit of resolution and resolving power of a microscope.

in terms of wave length.

7.3.10 Define resolving power of a Telescope.

7.3.11 Write the formula for resolving power of Telescope interms of wavelength.

7.3.12 Solve simple problems.

7.4.1 Define Polarisation.

7.4.2 Describe an experiment to demonstrate the transverse nature of light.

7.4.3 Represent unpolarised and polarized light geometrically.

7.4.4 Define plane of vibration.

7.4.5 Define plane of polarization,..

7.4.6 Explain the method of polarization by reflection.

7.4.7 State Brewster’s law. Define Brewster’s angle.

7.4.8 Obtain equation for refractive index interms of Brewster’s angle.

7.4.9 Explain the method of polarization by refraction.

7.4.10 Explain the method of polarization by double refraction.

7.4.11 Explain polaroids.

7.4.12 List the use of polaroids.

Page 72: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Unit No.08 MODERN PHYSICS 09 Hrs

GENERAL OBJECTIVES

8.1 To understand the emission of electrons.

8.2 To know the scattering of light.

8.3 To understand Lasers.

8.4 To understand radio-activity.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

8.1.1 Explain thermionic emission.

8.1.2 Explain photoelectric emission.

8.1.3 Explain Field emission.

8.1.4 Explain secondary emission.

8.1.5 Define photoelectric effect.

8.1.6 Describe an experiment to study photoelectric effect. Explain experimental results.

8.1.7 State four laws of photoelectric emission.

8.1.8 Write photoelectric equation.

8.1.9 Explain the quantities involved in it.

8.1.10 Explain photoemissive cell.

8.1.11 Explain photovoltaic cell.

8.1.12 Explain photoconductive cell.

8.1.13 List the applications of photoelectric cells.

8.1.14 Explain the principle of electrons microscope.

8.1.15 Explain the method of focusing by magnetic lens.

8.1.16 Explain the construction and working.

8.1.17 List the uses of electron microscope.

8.1.18 Explain the working of Atomic Focus Microscope.

8.1.19 Write the advantages of Atomic Focus Microscope.

8.2.1 Explain coherent scattering.

8.2.2 Explain incoherent scattering.

8.2.3 Explain the blue colour of the sky and blue colour of water.

8.2.4 Explain the red colour of sun during sunrise and sunset.

8.2.5 Explain the white colour of cloud.

8.2.6 Explain Raman Effect.

8.2.7 Write the applications of Raman Effect

8.3.1 Define laser .

8.3.2 Explain Induced absorption.

8.3.3 Explain spontaneous emission and stimulated emission.

8.3.4 State the principle of Laser.

8.3.5 Explain population inversion and optical pumping.

8.3.6 List the properties of laser.

8.3.7 Write the applications of laser.

8.4.1 Explain radioactivity with examples.

8.4.2 Describe an experiment to demonstrate three types of radiations.

8.4.3 Write the properties of alpha,beta and gamma rays.

8.4.4 List the agricultural ,medical,biological and geological applications of lasers.

Page 73: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Unit No.09 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY 08 Hrs

GENERAL OBJECTIVES

9.1 To understand pollution, its harm full effects and preventive measures.

9.2 To comprehend water pollution, its harm full effects and preventive measures.

9.3 To understand different types of corrosion and preventive measures.

9.4 To comprehend pH of solution , pH scale and applications of pH.

.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

9.1.1 Define pollution.

9.1.2 List air pollutants.

9.1.3 Write the harmfull effects of air pollution.

9.1.4 Explain acid rain and its effects.

9.1.5 Explain green house effect.

9.1.6 Explain global warming.

9.1.7 List the effects of global warming.

9.1.8 Explain ozone layer and its importance.

9.1.9 List the cause of depletion of ozone layer(without any equation).

9.1.10 List the effects of ozone layer.

9.1.11 Discuss the control of air pollution.

9.2.1 Explain water pollution,

9.2.2 Discuss the causes of water pollution.(seweage,effluents,algai,micro-organisms).

9.2.3 Explain methods of control of sewage problems and disposals.

9.3.1 Define corrosion.

9.3.2 Explain the causes of corrosion.

9.3.3 Describe different types of corrosion.(i)electrochemical theory of corrosion.

(ii) Formation of galvanic cells.(iii)concentration cells

9.3.4 Explain the preventive measures of corrosion.

i.by alloying ii.by surface coating iii.by galvanizing iv.by electroplating

v.by anodizing vi.by cathodic protection.

9.4.1 Explain water as a weak electrolyte.

9.4.2 Explain nature of solution on the basis of (H+) ion and (OH¯) ion concentrations.

9.4.3 Explain ionic product of pure water.

9.4.4 Define neutral,basic and acidic solutions.

9.4.5 Define pH of a solution.

9.4.6 Define neutral basic and acidic solution by using pH.

9.4.7 Give the pH values some solutions

9.4.8 Write the applications of pH solution.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Applied Science –By W.R. Neelakanta , Sapna Publications

2. Applied Science –By N N Banavasi, S Chand Publications

3. First PUC and Second PUC Physics Text Books – by different authors..

4. Text book of physical chemistry by P.L.Soni publisher S.Chand and Co.

Page 74: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

5. Essentials of physical chemistry by B.S.Bhal and G.B.Tuli,

6. Text bookof physical chemistry by K.K.Sharma and L.K.Sharma, Vikas publication house.

7. Applied Science for polytechnics- by different authors.

APPLIED SCIENCE

TABLE OF SPECIFICATION FOR QUESTION PAPER SETTING

Unit No No Hrs in

curriculum

No of

subdivisions

of 5 marks

each to be

answered

Total

marks to

be

answered

No of

subdivisions

of 5 marks

to be set

Total

marks

to be set

Section

A

01 06

05 25 07 35 02 06

03 06

Section

B

04 10

07 35 11 55 05 05

06 12

Section

C

07 12

08 40 12 60 08 09

09 08

Total 20 100 30 150

BOARD OF TECHNICAL EXAMINATION- KARNATAKA

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

APPLIED SCIENCE Time:3Hrs Max Marks:100

Note: 1) Answer any 05 subdivisions from Section A, any 07 sub divisions

from Section B and any 08 subdivisions from Section C

2) Each subdivision carries 5 marks.

Section A (Answer any 05 subdivisions)

1. a) What is meant by Least count of a measuring instrument

Write dimensions of density

Write the S.I. unit of a acceleration 2 + 2 + 1

b) State and prove the law of conservation of momentum 2 + 3

c) State Newton’s Second law of motion.

Page 75: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

A body of mass 2kg is moving with a velocity of 2m/s. If its velocity changes to

5m/s in 10 seconds on application of a constant force, calculate the acceleration of

the body & Impulse on it. 2 + 3

2. a) Write a neat diagram of screw gauge & name its parts 3 + 2

b) State the law of parallelogram of vectors.

Obtain an expression for the magnitude of the resultant of two

Vectors acting at a point. 2 + 3

3. a) Describe an experiment to verify Lami’s theorem 5

b) Define Moment of a force.

Three forces 3kgwt, 7kgwt & 15kgwt, acting at a point are in equilibrium.

Calculate the angle between first two forces. 2 + 3

Section B (Answer any 07 subdivisions)

4. a) Define stress.

Differentiate between plasticity and elasticity with examples. 2 + 3

b) Define Young’s Modulus

Write 3 applications of capillarity 2 + 3

c) Describe an experiment to determine surface tension of water by

capillary rise method 5

5. a) Distinguish between specific heat of a substance & heat capacity of a body.

Write two applications of convection. 2 + 3

b) Define surface tension and angle of contact.

Write 3 applications of viscosity. 2 + 3

c) Derive PV = mRT with usual notations 5

6. a) Define SHM

Obtain an expression for the velocity of a vibrating body executing SHM 2 + 3

b) Describe an experiment to determine velocity of sound in air at room temperature,

using Resonance Air Column apparatus. 5

c) What is resonance?

Write 3 practical examples of resonance. 2 + 3

7. a) Describe an experiment to determine the frequency of the tuning fork

using sonometer by comparison method. 5

b) The frequency of a sonometer wire is doubled when the tension is increased

by 12 kgwt. Calculate the original tension of the wire. 5

Page 76: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Section C (Answer any 08 subdivisions)

8. a) What is interference of light?

Write three differences between Interference & diffraction. 2 + 3

b) Obtain an expression for the path difference in Young’s double slit experiment.

5

c) In a double slit experiment light of wave length 5500 Å is used. Find the

path difference & phase difference for the fourth dark fringe from the

centre of the pattern. 5

9. a) State Brewster’s law.

Obtain an expression for the refractive index of a material in terms of

Brewster’s angle. 2 + 3

b) What is polarization?

Explain the method of polarization by refraction 2 + 3

c) What is photoelectric emission?

Write any three experimental results on the study of photoelectric effect.

2 + 3

10. a) Explain the focusing the magnetic lens in an Electron microscope

Write 3 uses of Electron microscope. 2 + 3

b) What is Raman effect.

Explain stimulated emission in Laser. 2 + 3

c) What is radio activity?

Describe an experiment to demonstrate 3 types of radiations. 2 + 3

11. a) What is an acid rain? Write 3 harmful effects of it. 2 + 3

b) What are the causes of water pollution?

Explain any one method of controlling sewage problem. 2 + 3

c) How does a “ Concentration cell” work?

Write three applications of PH. 2 + 3

0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0

Page 77: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

GOVERNMENT OF KARNATAKA

BOARD OF TECHNICAL EXAMINATIONS

First/Second SemesterDiploma APPLIED SCIENCE LAB (COMMON TO ALL COURSES) SUBJECT CODE:

Group A

Experiment No Aim of the experiment

01 To determine the volume of the given solid cylinder using Slide calipers

02 To determine the volume of the given Hollow cylinder using Slide calipers

03 To determine the thickness of the glass and metal plate using Screw gauge

04 To determine the volume of thin wire using Screw gauge & sample wire

05 To determine the volume of small rigid ball using Screw gauge

06 To verify the law of Parallelogram of vectors

07 To verify the converse of law of triangle of vectors

08 To verify the Lami’s theorem

09 To verify two conditions of equilibrium of coplanar parallel forces

Group B

10 To determine Young’s Modulus of the material of the wire using Searle’s App

11 To determine Surface Tension of water by capillary rise method

12 To determine the frequency of the given tuning fork using sonometer by

comparison method

13 To determine the frequency of the given tuning fork using sonometer by

absolute method

14 To determine velocity of sound in air at room temperature & at 0°C a by

Resonance Air Column method

15 To determine coefficient of Viscosity of water by Poisulle’s method

Most Important instructions to examiners

i) While setting two experiments in the examination for each candidate, one experiment

should be chosen from group A and another must be from group B

ii) While setting two experiments, large number of combinations to be made covering

most of the experiments

iii) The scheme of valuation given below must be strictly followed.

Scheme of valuation

Record 05 Marks

Oral 15 Marks

Planning ( Includes observation, Tabular column, Formula) 20 Marks ( 10 marks x 2 expt)

Conducting ( Includes skill in arrangement, handling of app, 40 Marks ( 20 marks x 2 expt)

Page 78: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

& readings)

Calculation and result 20 Marks ( 10 marks x 2 expt)

Total 100 Marks

Page 79: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Diploma Programme

SECOND SEMESTER

Common to E&C ,EI&C, CS&E, IS&E& MXHrs / Week -- 4 Total Hrs - 64

SL Topics

Section - I

1 Introduction to 'C' Language

2 Condition and Loops

Section - II

3 Arrays

4 Strings

Section - III

5 Structures & Unions

6 Functions

7 Preprocessor

Tests & Assignment

Total

CONTENTS

 Topics  Content

1 Introduction to 'C' Language

1.01 Character set, Variable and Identifiers, Built-in Data Types, Variable

Definition, Declaration, C Key Words-Rules & Guidelines for Naming

Variables.

1.02 Arithmetic operators and Expressions, Constants and Literals, Precedence

and Order of Evaluation.

1.03 Simple assignment statement, Basic input/output statement.

1.04 Simple 'C' programs.

2 Condition and Loops

2.01 Decision making within a Program.

2.02 Conditions, Relational Operators, Logical Operator.

2.03 if statement, if-else statement.

2.04 Break, Continue, Switch, Goto and Labels.

2.05 Loop statements.

3 Arrays

Department of Technical Education

CURRICULUM

SUBJECT : 'C' PROGRAMING

Page 80: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

What is an Array?, Declaring an Array, Initializing an Array. One

dimensional arrays: Array manipulation;Finding the largest/smallest

element in array; Searching & Sorting of element from an array;

Decalring & Initilisation of Two dimensional arrays, Addition/Multiplication

of two matrices, Transpose of a square matrix; Null terminated strings as

array of characters.

4 Strings

Introduciton, Declaring & Initialising string variables, Reading & writing

strings from variables, Arithmetic operations & chracters, Putting strings

together, Comparision of two strings, String handling functions

5Structures & Unions

Basic of Structures, Structures variables, initialization, structure

assignment, nested structure, structures and arrays: arrays of

structures,Unions, Size of structures, Bit fields

6 Functions

Definition of Functions, Standard Library of C functions, Prototype of a

function: Formal parameter list, Return Type, Function call, Block

structure, Passing arguments to a Function: call by value, arrays as

function arguments, Structure and functions

7 Pre-Processors

Introduction, Macro substituion, File inclusion

Page 81: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

General Objectives-          Comprehend the different operators.

-          Understand the basic input/output statements.

-          Understand the control structures.

-          Understand the arrays concept.

-          Solve simple problems using arrays.

-          Know the user defined functions.

-          Design a function to solve a problem.

          Understand the structure and union concept.

Appairse different string functions

Understand Preprocessor statement

Specific Objectives-          List the character set.

-          Define the following

keyword, variable, constants.

-          Describe the built-in data types.

-          List the variables naming rules.

-          Explain the arithmetic, relational, logical operators and expression.

-          Discuss the precedence and order of evaluation.

-          Describe the simple assignment & Basic input/output statements.

-          Write simple C programs.

-          List different types of control structures.

-          Describe if, if-else, switch conditional statements.

-          Explain for, while, do-while loop control structure.

-          Define break, continue, goto, labels.

-          Define array, string.

-          Classify array.

-          Discuss insertion, deletion, sorting, searching operations on single

dimensional array.

-          Explain addition, subtraction, multiplication, transpose operations on matrices.

-          Define function.

-          Describe function prototyping.

-          List built in functions.

-          Define formal, actual parameters.

-          Describe block structure.

     Explain call-by-value

Describe basics of structure & Unions

         Restate structure variables, initialization, assignment.

Explain nested structures, structure & functions, structure & arrays.

Explain C Preprocessing statements

Page 82: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Text Books

1 Programming With 'C' By Dr. M A Jayaram & D S Rajendra Prasad

Reference BooksTitle/Publisher

1 Programming with ANSI-C, Fourth Edition, Tata Mcgraw Hill.

2 Let us C, BPB Publication, New Delhi.

3 Programming with C, Second Edition, Tata Mcgrawhill, 2000.

4Programming with ANSI & Turbo C, First Edition, 2002, Pearson

Education.

5 Basics of Computers and Applications with C programming.

Page 83: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Hours Marks

12 30

12 30

12 30

4 10

8 20

8 20

4 10

4

64 150

Periods

12

12

12

Department of Technical Education

CURRICULUM

SUBJECT : 'C' PROGRAMING

Page 84: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

4

8

8

4

Page 85: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

-          Explain addition, subtraction, multiplication, transpose operations on matrices.

Page 86: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Yashwant Kanetkar

Rajesh Hongal

Author

Byron Gottfried

A. Kamthane

E. Balaguruswami

Page 87: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Programme

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL ENGINEERING( IC)

Second semester

Subject: ‘C’ programming and Hardware Lab

Contacts Hrs/week: 6 Contact Hrs/Semester:96

PART-A

General Objectives:

After the completion of the study of this subject students should be able to

-Analyze the given problem

-Think the logic to solve the given problem

-Write algorithms to flowchart for any given problem

-write programs to solve the given problem in C

-Know the various data types, operators and expressions in C

-Know the various control structures In C

-Understand Arrays, Strings, Structures and Unions in C

Graded Exercises

Write and execute the following programms

1. To conduct voltage, current and resistance when any two parameters are given 03

2. To calculate effective resistance in series -03

3. To calculate effective resistance in parallel -03

4. To calculate effective capacitance in series -03

5. To calculate effective capacitance in parallel -03

6. To calculate impedance(z)of RLC connected in series -03

7. To calculate alpa(α), beta(β), In CE and CB Mode -03

8. Program to compute the drain current -03

9. Program to calculate current when voltage is varying from 1 to10 -03

10. To compute the rms value,averagevalue and form factor of an

alternating quantity -03

Page 88: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Programme

11. Program to find voltage for given values of current and resistance -03

using function

12. Program to get the resonant condition and print resonant frequency for a

Given value of R,L,C series ckt by varying frequency -03

13.progam to compute and display voltage gain of an amplifier for different

Values Of voltage keeping input voltage constant -03

14.program to perform star to Delta conversion -03

15.program to perform Delta to star conversion -03

16. program to findout valency of an atom -03

17.Program to compute current thro the diode given V,vt,io and efficiency -03

18.program to calculate inductive reactance, capacitance reactance for a

Given circuit parameter -03

19. Program to compute number of electrons required to make ‘n’columbs

Of charge -03

20. Program to calculate resistance using colour code. -03

PART-B

IIsem IC

1. Exercise to disassemble and assemble of a computer system -03

2. Installation of multimedia educational CD’s and View the contents -03

3. Exercise of Installing various application software and operating system -03

4. Installing and using of any antivirus software and PC diagnostic

Tools practice on their use -03

5. Study the working principle and install a scanner Digital camera, a modem,

Webcamera, Listing out the various models available in the market

Along with their specifications. -06

6. Studying the SMPS and measuring the various output voltages and

Identifying the cards/components/systems to which they are connected -03

7. Studying a floopy disc drive (FDD)& a Hard disk (HDD) and understanding

Formatting &their need -0

8. Studying of CD’s and CD drives,DVD’s and DVD drives exercise on installilng

CD&DVD drives and reading from them/writing on them -03

Page 89: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Programme

Note: Installation of operating system is not for examination

IISem IC

‘C’programing &Hardware Lab

Scheme of valuation

Marks

1. Lab record -05

2. Writing program from part-A -15

3. Entering program -10

4. Execution of program - 20

5. Result/Print out -10

6. Writing & implementation from

Part-B -20

7.Viva-viva -20

________

100

__________

Ref: Programming with ‘c’ Language , Tata McGraw-Hill – C.BalaguruSwamy

Programming with ‘c’, Venugopal and Prasad

The PC Data hand book – Stanley Shell

IBM PC and Clones – Rajesh Hongal

Page 90: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Applied Mathematics – II Page 1 of 11

BOARD OF TECHNICAL EXAMINATION –

KARNATAKA

SUBJECT: APPLIED MATHEMATICS – II

For II - Semester

DIPLOMA COURSES OF ALL BRANCHES

Contact hour per week: 04 Contact hour per Semester: 64

UNIT NO. CHAPTER TITLE CONTACT

HR.

DIFFERENTIATION CALCULUS 1 LIMITS 6

2 DIFFERENTIATION 16

3 APPLICATIONS OF DIFFERENTIATION 6

INTEGRAL CALCULUS

4 INDEFINITE INTEGRATION 14

5 DEFINITE INTEGRATION 4

6 APPLICATIONS OF DEFINITE INTEGRATION 2

7 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

8 TESTS AND ASSIGNMENTS 4

TOTAL HOUR 64

REFFERENCE BOOKS: 1. Applied Mathematics –II By W.R Neelakanta. Sapna Publications.

2. Applied Mathematics –II By Dr. D S Prakash S Chand Publications

3. Text Books of PUC-2 mathematics.

4. Applied Mathematics –II for Polytechnics- By different Authors.

5. Engineering Mathematics.

Page 91: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Applied Mathematics – II Page 2 of 11

QUESTION PAPER BLUE PRINT

FOR APPLIED MATHEMATICS – II

UN

IT N

O.

HO

UR

Questions

to be set (2

Marks)

PART- A

Questions

to be set (5

Marks)

PART- B

Questions

to be set (5

Marks)

PART- C

Questions

to be set (5

Marks)

PART- D

1 6 2 2 - -

2 16 4 6 - -

3 6 2 2 - -

4 14 4 - 6 -

5 4 3 - 1 -

6 2 - - 1 - 7 12 - - - 6

TOTA

L

64 15 10 08 06

Questions to

be answered 10 07 05 04

APPLIED – MATHEMATICS – II

Marks No. of Questions No. of Questions

to be set to be Answered

Part A 2 X 10 = 20 15 10

Part B 5 X 07 = 35 10 07

Part C 5 X 05 = 25 08 05

Part D 5 X 04 = 20 06 04

Total = 100

Page 92: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Applied Mathematics – II Page 3 of 11

Diploma Courses of All Engineering Branches

II Semester

Sub: Applied Mathematics II

CONTENTS

UNIT – 1: LIMITS. 6 Hr.

Variables and Constants. Definition of function. Types of function: Direct and

Inverse functions, Explicit and implicit function, Odd and even functions (Definition

with examples). Concept of x tends to ‘a’. Definition of limit of a function. Problems

on limit of a function by factorization, rationalization when x tend to ‘0’, when x tend

to ‘∞’ and x tend to ‘a’. Derivations of algebraic and trigonometric limits. Problems.

Standard limit (only statement)

enenx

ea

x

an

n

n

n

x

xe

x

x

1

0001lim 4.

11lim3. 1

1lim.2 log

1lim.1

Simple problems on standard limits.

UNIT – 2: DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 16 Hr.

Definition of increment and increment ratio. Definition of derivative of a

function. Derivatives of functions of xn, sinx, cosx and tanx with respect to ‘x’ from

first principle method. List of standard derivatives. Rules of differentiation: Sum,

product and quotient of functions. Problems on rules. Derivatives of function of a

function (Chain rule). Derivatives of inverse Trigonometric functions, Hyperbolic

functions and inverse of hyperbolic functions, Implicit functions, Parametric

functions. Problems. Logarithmic differentiation. Problems. Successive differentiation

up to second order. Problems.

UNIT – 3: APPLICATIONS OF DIFFERENTIATION. 6 Hr.

Geometrical meaning of derivative. Equation of tangent and normal to the

curve y = f(x) at a given point. Derivative as a rate measure. Definition of increasing

and decreasing function. Maxima and minima of a function.

UNIT – 4: INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 14 Hr.

Definition of Integration. List of standard integrals. Rules of integration (only

statement)

problems. Integration by substitution method. Problems. Integrals of functions

involving a2 + x

2 , a

2 – x

2 and their radicals. Some important integrals of the type

g(x)dxf(x)dxdxg(x)f(x) 2. .)()(.1 dxxfkdxxkf

Page 93: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Applied Mathematics – II Page 4 of 11

proof. with sin 2. tan1

.1 1

22

1

22c

a

x

xa

dxc

a

x

aax

dx

proof) no 7 to3 ( sec1

7.

cosh 6. .0 a if log2

1 5.

.0 x if log2

1 4. sinh.3

1

22

1

2222

22

1

22

ca

x

aaxx

dx

ca

x

ax

dxxc

xa

xa

axa

dx

acax

ax

aax

dxc

a

x

xa

dx

Integrals of the forms:

Problems. dx. ,dx , ,

2222cbxax

qpx

cbxax

qpx

cbxax

dx

cbxax

dx

Integration by parts. Rule of integration by parts. Problems.

Integration of the forms: Problems. dx)(ff(x) 1x

xe

UNIT – 5: DEFINITE INTEGRALS. 4 Hr.

Definition of Definite integral. Theorems on definite integrals. Problems.

Definite integrals of the type Problems. tan1

1 ,

tan1

12

0

2

0

dxx

dxx

UNIT – 6: APPLICATIONS OF DEFINITE INTEGRALS. 2 Hr.

Find area, volume and r m s value of a function. Problems.

UNIT – 7: DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS. 12 Hr.

Definition, example, order and degree of differential equation with examples.

Formation of differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants up to second

order. Solution of D E of first degree and first order by variable separable method.

Solution of differential equations reducible to variable separable form. Linear

equations and its solution. Solution of differential equations reducible to linear form-

Bernoulli’s form. Homogeneous form and its solution. Solution of differential

equations reducible to homogeneous form. Exact differential equation and its solution.

Solutions of differential equation of a type

problems. Simple constants. are c b, a, where,02

2

cydx

dyb

dx

yda

Page 94: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Applied Mathematics – II Page 5 of 11

GENERAL AND SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

UNIT – 1: LIMITS. 6 Hr.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

1.1 To understand variables, constants and functions.

1.2 To know the indeterminant form and evaluation of limit of a given function.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

1.1.1 Explain calculus as calculation of Infinitesimal values.

1.1.2 Define Independent, dependent variable and constants with examples.

1.1.3 Define a function.

1.1.4 List types of functions.

1.1.5 Define 1. Direct and inverse functions 2. Explicit and Implicit function

3.Odd and even function with examples.

1.2.1 Explain the concept of x tends ‘a’.

1.2.2 Define limit of a function.

1.2.3 Solve problems on limit of a function by factorization.

1.2.4 Solve problems on limit of a function by rationalization.

1.2.5 Solve problems on limit of a function when x tends INFINITY.

1.2.6 Deduce

radiansin is where1sin

lim

number. rationalany for lim

0

1

nnn

axna

ax

ax

1.2.7 Solve problems on above results.

1.2.8. Write formula for standard limits(statement only).

n

nx

e

x

nenx

ea

x

a 1

0nn0x0x1lim

11lim 3. 1

1lim 2. log

1lim1.

1.2.9 Solve simple problems on above results.

UNIT – 2: DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 16 Hr.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

2.1 To understand the differentiation of a function in terms of limit of a function.

2.2 To know different methods of differentiation.

2.3 To know the derivatives of higher order up to second order.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

Page 95: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Applied Mathematics – II Page 6 of 11

2.1.1 Define increment and increment ratio.

2.1.2 Define differentiation.

2.1.3 Derive the differential co-efficient (dy/dx).

2.1.4 Derive differentiation of a functions from first principle method xn , Sinx, Cosx

and Tanx with respect to ‘x’.

2.1.5 State derivative of ex and log x.

2.2.1 State rules of differentiation: Derivatives of Sum, Product and quotient of

function.

2.2.2 Solve problems on rules of differentiation.

2.2.3 Obtain the derivatives of function of a function (Chain Rule), Inverse T-

functions, Implicit functions & Parametric functions

2.2.4 Solve problems on above types.

2.2.5 Carry out logarithmic Differentiation

2.2.6 Solve problem of the type xx , a

x , x

Sin x, x

1/x etc.,

2.3.1 Obtain the second derivative of a function.

2.3.2 Solve problems on Successive differentiation.

UNIT -3: APPLICATIONS OF DIFFERENTIATION. 6Hr.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

3.1 To understand dy/dx as slope of a tangent.

3.2 To illustrate dy / dx as a rate measure.

3.3 To understand maxima and minima of a function.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

3.1.1 Explain geometrical meaning dy / dx as a slope of tangent.

3.1.2 Find equation of tangent and normal to a curve y = f(x) at a given point.

3.1.3 Solve problems on tangent and normals.

3.2.1 Explain derivative as a rate measure.

3.2.2 Obtain velocity and acceleration for a moving body whose equation of motion

is given.

3.2.3 Solve problems on rate measure including variation of area, volume etc.,

3.3.1 Define increasing and decreasing function.

3.3.2 State the condition for maxima and minima of a function, no proof.

3.3.3 Find maximum and minimum values of a function.

UNIT – 4: INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 14 Hr.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

4.1 To know integration as converse process of differentiation.

4.2 To understand indefinite integral.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

4.1.1 Define integration as anti derivative.

4.1.2 List of standard integrals.

4.1.3 State rules of Integration.

Page 96: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Applied Mathematics – II Page 7 of 11

4.1.4 Solve the problems on rules of integration.

4.2.1 Explain integration by substitution method.

4.2.2 Solve problems on substitution method.

4.2.3 Derive . sin 2. tan1

.1 1

22

1

22c

a

x

xa

dxc

a

x

aax

dx

4.2.4 Write

proof) no 7 to3 ( sec1

7.

cosh 6. .0 a if log2

1 5.

.0 x if log2

1 4. sinh.3

1

22

1

2222

22

1

22

ca

x

aaxx

dx

ca

x

ax

dxxc

xa

xa

axa

dx

acax

ax

aax

dxc

a

x

xa

dx

4.2.4 Solve problems on above results.

4.2.5 Write

dx. ,dx , ,

2222cbxax

qpx

cbxax

qpx

cbxax

dx

cbxax

dx

4.2.5 Solve problems on above results.

4.2.6 Explain the rule integration by parts.

4.2.7 Solve problems of the type x sinx, x2 Cos x, (ax + b) e

x, x sin

2x, log x, e

x sinx,

x log x etc.,

4.2.8 Solve problems of the type dx)(ff(x) 1x

xe

UNIT – 5: DEFINITE INTEGRALS. 4 Hr.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

5.1 To understand the concept of definite integral to eliminate constant of

integration.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

5.1.1 State, a b f(x) dx as a definite integral.

5.1.2 State theorems on definite integrals.

5.1.3 Solve the problems of the same type as in indefinite integral using limits of

integration.

5.1.4 Solve definite integrals of the type tan1

1 ,

tan1

12

0

2

0

dxx

dxx

UNIT – 6: APPLICATIONS OF DEFINITE INTEGRALS. 2 Hr.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

Page 97: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Applied Mathematics – II Page 8 of 11

6.1 To understand definite integral as a tool to find area under the curve, volume

of solid of revolution and r m s value of a function.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

6.1.1 Explain definite integral as a limit of sum (statement).

6.1.2 Write the formulae for finding area, volume and r m s value of a function.

6.1.3 Solve problems on above applications.

UNIT – 7: DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS. 12 Hr.

GENERAL OBJECTIVES.

7.1 To understand the concept of differential equation.

7.2 To solve differential equation for unknown functions.

SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES.

7.1.1 Define differential equation with examples.

7.1.2 Define Order and Degree of D E with examples.

7.1.3 Formation of D E by eliminating arbitrary constants.

7.2.1 Obtain the solution of D E by variable separable method.

7.2.2 Solve problems on variable separable method.

7.2.3 Obtain the solution of D E by Reducible to variable separable method – Solve

problems.

7.2.4 Obtain the solution of linear D E of the type QPydx

dy --solve problems.

7.2.5 Obtain the solution of D E by Reducible to linear form (Bernoulli’s form) –solve

problems.

7.2.6 Obtain the solution of D E by Homogeneous form – solve problems.

7.2.7 Obtain the solution of D E by Reducible to homogeneous form – solve problems

7.2.8 Obtain the solution of Exact D E --- solve problems.

7.2.9 Obtain the solution of D E of the type ,02

2

cydx

dyb

dx

yda -- Solve simple

problems only.

*************************************************

Page 98: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Applied Mathematics – II Page 9 of 11

BOARD OF TECHNICAL EXAMINATION – KARANATAKA

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Code:

APPLED MATHEMATICS –II ( FOR ALL COURSES)

Time: 3 Hrs

Maximum marks:100

NOTE: i) Answer any 10 questions in section A, 7 questions in section B

5 questions in section C, & 4 questions in D

ii) Each question carries 2 marks in section A

iii) Each question carries 5 marks in remaining section

SECTION – A

1. Evaluate 2

20

sin 3lim

tan 4x

x

x

2.Evaluate3

42

8lim

16x

x

x

3. Find dy

dx if y = 1 –cos4x

4. Find dy

dx if x

2 + y

2 = a

2

5. Find dy

dx if x = a sinθ and y = a cosθ

6. Find the slope of a tangent to the curve y = x2+6x – 7 at point ( 1, –2)

7. If s = 4t2 – 4t + 6 then find velocity when t = 2second

8. Evaluate tanx xe e dx

9. Evaluate 2sin xdx

10 Evaluate cos (1 4 )ec x dx

11. Evaluate

4

0

1dx

x

12. Evaluate2

0

sin x dx

Page 99: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Applied Mathematics – II Page 10 of 11

13. Evaluate 2

2

0

tan x dx

14. Evaluate2

sin

cos

xdx

x

15. Show that( )xd a

dx = a

x loge a

SECTION – B

1. Prove geometrically 0

sinlim

2. Evaluate0

3sin 2 5lim

4 tanx

x x

x x

1 xdy

edx

3. Find the derivative of tanx w.r.to x form the first principle

4. If y = ex ( sinx – cosx ), find dy/dx.

5. If y = 2 3sinh

3 2cosh

x

x

, find dy/dx

6. If xcoy + ysin(x/y) = k find dy/dx.

7. Find dy/dx if x = a(cosθ + θ ) and y = a ( 1 – sinθ )

8. If y = sinx cosx

, find dy/dx.

9. Find the equations of tangent and normal to the curve y2 = 9x at ( 1, - 3 )

10. Find the maximum and minimum value of the fuction 2x3 - 12 x

2 + 18x + 5.

SECTION – C

1. Evaluate 3sin xdx

2. Evaluate 2 6 13

dx

x x

3. Evaluate 2 sinx xdx

4. Evaluate 2

2 3

8 2

xdx

x x

5. Evaluate 2

3

0

cos x dx

Page 100: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Applied Mathematics – II Page 11 of 11

6. Evaluate .logx xdx

7. Evaluate 4

2 1

xdx

x

8. find the area bounded by the curve y = 4x – x2 – 3 and x-axis.

SECTION – D

Solve the following equations;

1.sec2x tany dx + sec

2y tanx dy= 0

2. y (1 + x) dx + x (1 + y) dy = 0

3. (y3 – 3x

2y ) dx – (x

3 – 3xy

2 ) dy = 0

4. ( 3y – 7x + 7 ) dx + ( 7y – 3x + 3 ) dy = 0

5. ( 2x + y + 1 ) dx + ( x + 2y + 1 ) dy = 0

6. ey 1 xdy

edx

0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0-o-0

Page 101: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

SC Devices Lab

Diploma Programme

SECOND SEMESTER

Common to E&C ,EI&C

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

On completion of the Lab course the Student will be able to

1 Identify the active components

2 Understand the behavioural characteristics of Basic Semiconductor Devices

GRADED EXERCISES:

1 Forward Characteristics of Junction diode ( Both Silicon and Germanium)

2 Reverse Characteristics of Zener diode/Zener voltage regulator

3 Input characteristics of NPN Transistor in CB configuration

4 Output characteristics of NPN Transistor in CE configuration

5 Determination of 'ALPHA' and 'BETA' of a transistor

6 Reverse characteristics of a Photodiode

7 Output characteristics of Photo Transistor

8 Drain characteristics of JFET

9 Transfer characteristics of JFET

10 Semiconductor diode as half wave Rectifier

11 Transistor as Switch using LED

12 V-I Characteristics of UJT

13 V-I Characteristics of SCR.

14 V-I Characteristics of DIAC

15 V-I Characteristics of TRAIC

16 Mini Project - To Collect data like base configurations, operational characteristics,

applications and critical factors etc.on all the semiconductor devices studied in theory

and compile a Project Report through out and submit at the end of the semester.

To Assemble & test simple circuits using above components

Tests

REFERENCES:

1 Basic Electronics lab Manual -Paul. B. Zbar

1 Record 5

2 Writing Two circuit, Tabular column, Ideal graph, formulae ( 15*2 ) 30

3 Construction and Conduction 30

4 Result 15

5 Viva-Voce 20

100

Contact Hrs / Week - 6 Contact Hrs / Semester: 96

SCHEME OF VALUATION

Total

Department of Technical Education

SUBJECT : SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES LAB

Page 1 of 1

Page 102: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Semiconductor Devices

Diploma Programme

SECOND SEMESTER

Common to E&C ,EI&C Hrs / Week -- 4 Total Hrs - 64

GENERAL OBJECTIVES:

At the end the semester the student will be able to

1 Understand the theory of semiconductors

2 Study the working and applications of various semiconductor diodes.

3 Understand the working principle and applications of Bipolar Transistors, Field

Effect Transistors and other Semiconductor Devices

4 Familiarization of fabrication of Integrated circuits

TIME ALLOCATION:

TOPICS

UNIT-1

SEMICONDUCTOR THEORY

OTHER SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES

UNIT-2

BIPOLAR TRANSISTORS

LASER & MASER

INTEGRATED CIRCUITS

UNIT-3

FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTORS

OPTO ELECTRONIC DEVICES

TOTAL

CONTENTS:

SUBJECT : SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES

Page 1 of 2

Page 103: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Semiconductor Devices

Contact Hrs

25

13

12

19

12

3

4

20

12

8

64

SUBJECT : SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES

Page 2 of 2

Page 104: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engineering

Third semester

Subject: IC 304 Analog Circuits Lab

Contact Hours / week: 6 Contact hours / Sem: 96 hours

General Objectives

After the completion of the lab students must be able to

1) Construct and demonstrate the applications of

Diode

Transistor and F E T.

Op-amp

555 Timer

Study exercises

1) To be familiar with Op Amp IC data books and Transistor manuals 06

2) To be familiar with testing of transistor and Op Amp ICs 06

Graded exercises

1) Construct and demonstrate the working of Clipping and Clamping circuits 06

2) Construct Centre tap full wave rectifier with and without filter and to

Calculate the ripple factor 06

3) Construct Bridge rectifiers with and without filter and to calculate the ripple

factor 06

4) Construction and testing of single stage RC coupled amplifier and to draw its

Frequency response 03

5) Construction and testing of following circuits using transistor

(i) Hartley oscillator (ii) Colpitts Oscillator (iii) Crystal oscillators

(iv) UJT relaxation oscillator 15

6) Construction and testing of Op Amp (uA 741) as (i) Astable multivibrator

(ii) Monostable multivibrator 06

7) Construction and testing of Op Amp (uA 741) as (i) RC phase shift oscillator

(ii) Weinbridge oscillator 06

8) Construction and testing of IC 555 timer as (i) Astable multivibrator

(ii) Monostable multivibrator 06

9) Construction and testing of FET amplifier 03

10) Mini project - A Competency based approach to build an application 21

11) Tests and Assignment 06

Page 105: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Scheme of Valuation

Sl

no. Particulars Marks

1 Lab record 05

2 Writing circuit diagram, Tabular column & waveform , calculation

(Two circuits)

25

3 Construction and conduction ( One Circuit) 40

4 Result 10

5 Viva voce 20

Total 100

Page 106: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation and control Enng.

Third Semester

Subject: IC 301 Analog Circuits

Contact Hrs / week: 4hrs Contact hrs /Sem: 64 Hrs

Chapter no CONTENTS No of

Hours

Marks

1 Wave shaping circuits 04 10

2 Power supplies 09 23

3 Biasing and load line characteristics 06 16

4 Amplifiers 10 26

5 Sinusoidal oscillators 06 16

6 Operational amplifiers 12 32

7 Network theorems 08 20

8 Industrial Innovations 05

9 Tests and assignments 04

TOTAL 64 145

Chapter no SECTION-1 No. of hours

a) Fill in the blanks

b) Short notes (Op-Amps or Oscillators)

SECTION-II

1 Wave shaping circuits 04

2 Power supplies 09

3 Biasing and Load line characteristics 06

SECTION-III

4 Amplifier 10

7 Network theorems 08

SECTION-IV

5 Oscillators 06

6 Operational amplifiers 12

Page 107: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Enng.

Third Semester

Subject IC301: Analog Circuits

Contact Hrs/week: 4hrs Contact hrs/sem: 64rs

CONTENTS No of Hrs

1. WAVESHAPING CIRCUITS 04

Integrator & differentiator using passive elements ( R&C)

Clipping & clamping circuits

Applications of clipping & clamping circuits

2. POWER SUPPLIES 09

Rectifier circuits

Derivation of ripple factor in Half wave rectifier, full wave rectifier

Filter circuits & ripple factor in each case

Regulated DC power supply

Series, shunt and IC voltage regulators

Switch mode power supply, uninterrupted power supply(Ups)

3 BIASING & LOAD LINE CHARACTERISTICS 06

Faithful amplification and requirements to get faithful amplification

Importance of biasing and different types of biasing circuits

Importance of load line and method to locate operating point

4.0 AMPLIFIERS 10

Classification of amplifiers

Practical amplifier circuit

Various amplifier circuits and their comparison

Heat sinks in Transistors

5. SINUSOIDAL OSCILLATORS 06

Concept of feed back and its types

Basic oscillatory circuits

Barkhausen criteria for oscillation

Types of oscillators & their working

Page 108: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

6. OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 12

Parameters and characteristics of op amp

Working of op amp as

a) Zero crossing Detector and Comparator

b) Inverting and Non inverting Amplifier

c) Integrator and Differentiator

d) Summing and Difference Amplifier

Working of Active filters using op-amp

Working of RC Phase shift oscillator using op-amp

Working of Instrumentation Amplifier.

Block diagram and pin diagram of 555timer

Working 555timer as Astable and Monostable Multivibrator

7. NETWORK THOERMS 08

Definitions of Node , branch, loop

Statement and proof for various network theorems

Simple problems to be solved in each case

Page 109: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Enng.

Third Semester

Subject IC301: Analog Circuits

Contact hrs/week: 4hr Contact hrs / Sem: 64hr.

General Educational Objectives

After the completion of the course student will be able to

1. Appreciate the applications of diodes in wave shaping circuits

2. Appreciate the necessity of regulated DC power supply

3. Explain the biasing of transistors, importance of load line characteristics

4. Comprehend various types of amplifiers

5. Comprehend various types of oscillators

6. Appreciate the applications of op-amp, 555 Timer

7. Determine the current in a given branch of a network using Network

Theorem

SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES No of Hrs 1. Wave shaping circuits 04

1.1 Working of integrator, differentiator using passive elements(R&C)

1.2 Working of +ve, -ve biased clipping,(biased + ve ,-ve& combinational

1.3 Working of +ve,- ve biased clamping circuits

1.4 Applications of clipping and clamping circuits

2 Power supplies 09

2.1 Working of half wave &full wave (centre taped & bridge) , rectifiers

2.2 Definition of ripple factor and derive the expression for ripple factor

2.3 Need for filter circuits and working of C, LC and ∏ filters

2.4 Derivation of ripple factor in each case

2.5 Necessity of regulated power supply and definition of regulation

(Line and load)

2.6 Working of series and shunt voltage regulators

2.7 Working of IC (LM317, LM723, LM7805) regulators

2.8 Block diagram and working of SMPS, UPS

3 Biasing and load line characteristics 06

3.1 Definition of faithful amplification and requirement to get faithful

Amplification

3.2 Necessity of biasing circuit

Working of fixed bias, Self bias and potential divider bias circuits

Definition of stability factor and derivation in case

3.3 Definition of operating point and discuss its importance

method to draw DC load line and to locate the operating point

Page 110: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

4 AMPLIFIERS 10

4.1 Classification of amplifiers

Based on configuration, no of stages, coupling method, parameter

Being Amplified, location of operating point, frequency range

4.2 Practical circuit of single stage Transistor amplifier

4.3 Working of CE, CB and CC amplifiers, and their comparison

Working of RC coupled, Transformed coupled and Direct Coupled

Amplifiers frequency response of RC coupled and Transformed coupled,

working of Class A, Class B, Class C and push pull amplifier circuits and

their comparison

4.4 Necessity of heat sink in Transistors

5 SINUOSOIDAL OSCILLATORS 06

5.1 Concept of feedback, Difference between +ve, -ve feedback

5.2 working of Tank circuit

5.3 Barkhausen criterion for oscillations

5.4 Working of Hartley, Colpitt’s oscillators

5.4.1 Working of RC phase shift oscillator

5.4.2 Limitations of LC and RC oscillator

5.4.3 Working of crystal oscillator

6 OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 12

6.1 Definition of Op-amp, its parameters and to list its characteristics

6.2 Block diagram of Op-amp

6.3 Working of Op-amp as

6.3.1 Zero crossing detector and comparator

6.3.2 Inverting and Non inverting amplifier

6.3.3 Summing and Difference amplifier

6.3.4 Integrator and Differentiator

6.4 Working of Low pass, High pass, Band pass and Band reject filters

6.5 Working of RC Phase shift oscillator, Instrumentation Amplifier

6.6 Block diagram and pin diagram of IC 555 timer

IC 555 as Astable and Mono stable Multivibrator

7 NETWORK THEOREMS 08

7.1 Definitions of Node, Branch and Loop

7.2 Statement and proof for

7.2.1 Superposition theorem

7.2.2 Thevenin’s theorem

7.2.3 Norton’s theorem

7.2.4 Maximum power transfer theorem

7.3 Simple problem to be solved using above theorems

8 INDUSTRIAL INNOVATIONS 05

Student should be encouraged to collect information of different active,

passive components, op-amps and their applications

Documentation may be made on the collected topics

Page 111: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Text Books:

1.Analog Electronics by Veeranna & Janaki, Sapna Publications

REFERENCES

1. Op Amp and Linear Integrated circuits- By Ramakanth A Gayakawad

Fourth edition PHI

2 Analog Electronics by L.K Maheswari &.M.S Anand

3 Op amps and Linear ICS - by David A Bell

4 Principles of Electronics - by V.K Mehta & Rohit Mehta

5 Electronics devices and circuits –by David A Bell

6 Electronic circuits and Devices- By Allen Mottershed

7 Network lines & fields - By John D Ryder

8 Electronic Circuits- UB Mahadevaswamy, V. Nattarasu

Page 112: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of technical education

Diploma course in Electronic Instrumentation and control Enng.

Third Semester

Subject: Analog Circuits

Model Question paper

Note:

Section -1 is compulsory

Answer any two full questions from remaining sections

Maximum Marks: 100

SECTION-I

1a) Fill in the blanks with appropriate word/words 1*5=5

i) Ripple factor of full wave rectifier is___________

ii) To get faithful amplification VBE should be at least equal to ___ in Ge

transistors

iii) Collector current flows for only one half cycle of i/p voltage in___

Power amplifier

iv) Oscillators employ _____ feedback

v) The o/p impedance of Op-amp is_______

b) Write the pin diagram & features of IC 555 timer

SECTION-II

2a) Explain the working of Bridge Rectifier, mention its advantages &

Disadvantages 08

b) Explain the working of +ve clamper 05

c) What is regulation What are its types 02

3a) Explain the block diagram of SMPS 07

b) Explain the working of RC Differentiator 05

c) Prove that ripple factor of half wave rectifier is equal to 1.21 03

Page 113: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

4a) Explain potential divider bias in transistors 07

b) Define faithful amplification. What are the requirements to get faithful

amplification 04

c) Define operating point Explain its importance 04

SECTION –III

5a) Explain the working of RC coupled amplifier , draw its frequency

Response & explain 08

b) Explain the working of class A power amplifier 06

c) Name the amplifiers based on frequency range of operation 01

6a) Explain the working of push pull amplifier circuit 07

b) Explain the working of CC amplifier 05

c) Define node, branch & loop 03

7a) State & prove Thevenin’stheorem 07

b) Simple problem 06

c) State Superposition theorem 02

SECTION- IV

8a) Explain the working of RC phase shift oscillator 06

b) Explain the working of basic oscillatory circuit? What are the

requirements to get undamped oscillations from the tank circuit 06

c) What are the limitations of RC & LC oscillators 03

9a) Explain the working of monostable multivibrator using IC 555 timer 06

b) Explain the working of op-amp as summing amplifier 06

c) What are the characteristics of op-amp 03

10a) Explain Inverting & Non inverting amplifiers 08

b) What are filters Explain different types of filters 05

c) Explain the following op-amp parameters

i) CMRR ii) SLEW RATE 02

Page 114: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

Page 115: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engg

Subject IC302: Basic Process Instrumentation

Third Semester

Contact Hrs per Week: 4 Hrs Contact Hrs per Sem: 64 Hrs

GENERAL EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES

1 To Comprehend the Basic Concepts of Measurement, definition of various

parameters

2 To appreciate the significance of Transducers

3 To understand the application of Transducers in the measurement of various

physical parameters.

SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES No of Hours

1 Basic Concepts of Measurements. 04

1.1.1 Define Instrumentation

1.1.2 General Measurement System

1.1.3 Parameters Measure in a system

1.1.4 Basic Characteristics of Measurement system:

Accuracy, Precision, Sensitivity, Resolution, Threshold,

Errors, Linearity, Hysteresis, Reliability,

Maintainability and Span.

1.1.5 Need for Calibration.

2 Transducers 02

2.1.1 Define Transducers.

2.1.2 Classification of Transducers – Electrical, Mechanical,

And Optical

2.1.3 Classification of Electrical Transducers: Active and

Passive Types

2.1.4 Basic Requirements of a Transducers

3 Displacement Measurement 05

3.1.1 Introduction, Principles of Transduction

3.1.2 Variable Resistance transducers: Potentiometric

3.1.3 Variable Inductance: L V D T

3.1.4 Variable Capacitance

3.1.5 Digital Displacement transducers

4 Level Measurement 03

4.1.1 Introduction

4.1.2 Direct Level Measurement: Float Method.

4.1.3 Indirect Level Measurement: Ultrasonic Signal method,

Gamma ray method, Capacitive method.

Page 116: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

5 Strain Measurements 12

5.1.1 Introduction, Types of strain gauges.

5.1.2 Theory of operation of strain gauges – derivation of gauge

factor.

5.1.3 Types of Electrical Strain Gauges

5.1.4 Materials for strain gauges

5.1.5 Temperature Compensation. using quarter bridge, half bridge,

full bridge

6 Pressure Measurements. 10

6.1.1 Introduction

6.1.2 Diaphragm and other elastic elements – Capsules, Bellows,

Bourdon Tubes.

6.1.3 Basic method of Pressure Measurements using –

Potentiometric Device, Strain Gauge Transducers, LVDT type

Transducers, Variable Capacitance device.

6.1.4 Thin film Pressure Transducer.

6.1.5 Force Balance Transducer

6.1.6 Piezoelectric Pressure Transducer

6.1.7 Pressure Multiplexer.

6.1.8 Pressure Calibration: Standard Dead Weight Tester

7 Temperature Measurements 10

7.1.1 Introduction

7.1.2 Temperature Scales.

7.1.3 Mechanical Temperature Sensor – Liquid in glass

thermometers, Liquid filled Systems, Vapour Pressure

Thermometers.

7.1.4 Platinum Resistance Thermometers: Construction & Working

7.1.5 Thermocouples and Thermisters: Construction, working and

industrial applications.

7.1.6 Pyrometers: Optical Pyrometer, Radiation Pyrometer -

Construction & Working

7.1.7 Calibration of Thermometers.

8 Flow Measurements 09

8.1.1 Introduction

8.1.2 Classification of Flow Meters

8.1.3 Head Type Flow Meter: Orifice Meter, Venturi Meter

8.1.4 Rotameter – Construction and operation

8.1.5 Electromagnetic Flow meter : Operation

8.1.6 Anemometers: Hot Wire Anemometer, Laser Anemometer.

8.1.7 Ultrasonic Flow Meter: Operation.

9 Industrial Innovations 05

Student should be encouraged to collect information

regarding transducers used in various process control

applications. Documentation may be made on the

collected topics.

Page 117: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engg

Subject IC302: Basic Process Instrumentation

Third Semester

Contact Hrs per week: 4 Hrs Contact Hrs per Sem: 64 Hrs

Chapter T i t l e No of

Hrs

Marks

Weight

age

1 Basic Concepts of Measurement 04 10

2 Transducers 02 06

3 Displacement Measurement 05 13

4 Level Measurement 03 08

5 Strain Measurement 12 31

6 Pressure Measurement 10 26

7 Temperature Measurement 10 25

8 Flow Measurement 09 26

9 Industrial Innovations 05

Test and Assignments 04

Total 64 145

Pattern of Question Paper

Ch. No Content No of Hrs

Section I

a) Fill in the blanks

b) Short Notes ( Ch 7 & 8)

Section-II

1 Basic Concepts of Measurement 04

2 Transducer 02

5 Strain Measurement 12

Section-III

3 Displacement Measurement 05

4 Level Measurement 03

6 Pressure Measurement 10

Section IV

7 Temperature Measurement 10

8 Flow Measurement 09

Page 118: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engg

Subject IC302: Basic Process Instrumentation

Third Semester

Contact Hrs per week: 4 Hrs Contact Hrs per Sem: 64 Hrs

Contents No of Hours

1 Basic Concepts of Measurement 04

Definition of Instrumentation System, General Measurement System

Basic Characteristics of Measurement system. Need for Calibration.

2 Transducers 02

Definition of Transducers. Classification of Electrical Transducers.

Basic Requirements of Transducers.

3 Displacement Measurement 05

Introduction, Principles of Transduction - Variable Resistance,

Inductance, Capacitance, Digital Displacement transducers

4 Level Measurement 03

Introduction, Direct Level Measurement, Indirect Level Measurement

5 Strain Measurements 12

Introduction, Types of strain gauges, Theory of operation of strain gauges

derivation of gauge factor. Types of Electrical Strain Gauges, Materials

for strain gauges. Temperature Compensation.

6 Pressure Measurements. 10

Introduction, Diaphragm and other elastic elements – Capsules, Bellows,

Bourdon Tubes. Basic method of Pressure Measurements. Thin film

Pressure Transducer. Force Balance Transducer. Piezoelectric Pressure

Transducer. Pressure Multiplexer. Pressure Calibration: Standard Dead

Weight Tester

Page 119: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

7 Temperature Measurements 10

Introduction, Temperature Scales. Mechanical Temperature Sensors.

Platinum Resistance Thermometers: Construction & Working

Thermocouples and Thermisters: Construction, working and industrial

Applications. Pyrometers: Optical Pyrometer, Radiation Pyrometer -

Construction & Working. Calibration of Thermometers.

8 Flow Measurements 09

Introduction. Classification of Flow Meters, Head Type Flow Meters

Construction and operation of Rotameter, Electromagnetic, Ultrasonic

Flow Meters. Anemometers: Hot Wire and Laser Anemometers.

9 Industrial Innovations 05

References:

1) Instrumentation Devices & Systems: Rangan, Mani & Sharma.

2) Transducers & Instrumentation : S K Venkataram

3) Transducers & Instrumentation: D V S Murthy.

4) Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements: David Bell.

5) Introduction to Measurements and Instrumentation: Arun K Ghosh

6) Electrical &Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation: R K Rajput

(S Chand )

Page 120: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engg

Subject: Basic Process Instrumentation0

Third Semester

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Instructions

1) Section I is compulsory

2) Answer any two full questions from Section II, III, IV

3) Maximum Marks: 100

SECTION I

1 a) Fill in the Blanks (1*5=5)

i) Expansion of L V D T is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

ii) Unit of Strain is _ _ _ _ _ _

iii) Active transducers are based on _ _ _ _ _ _ principle

iv) Diaphragms are used to measure _ _ _ _ _ _ pressure.

v) Electromagnetic Flow Meter is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ type.

b) Write a note on classification of Flow Meters (5)

SECTION II

2 a) Explain Generalized System with diagram (7)

b) Define the following

i) Accuracy ii) Precision iii) Resolution (3)

c) Define transducers. Compare active and passive transducers (5)

3 a) Explain the theory of operation of resistance strain gauges and derive

the expression of Gauge Factor (8)

b) Define strain. What are the factors which affect the measurement of

Strain (4)

c) Write the materials for strain gauges (3)

4 a) Derive an expression for temperature for quarter bridge & explain (7)

b) Explain the different types of Electrical Strain Gauges (6)

c) Define poisons Coefficient of strain (2)

Page 121: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

SECTION III

5 a) Explain the working of L V D T (6)

b) Explain the working of variable capacitance transducer (5)

c) Explain level measurement using Ultrasonic Signal (4)

6 a) Explain pressure measurements using a diaphragm (8)

b) Write about different types of pressure sensing elements (5)

c) Define pressure (2)

7 a) Explain the working of Force Balance Transducer (7)

b) Explain the Level measurements using Gamma rays (6)

c) List the different types of direct and indirect Level Measuring

devices (2)

SECTION IV

8 a) Explain the different types of mechanical temperature sensors (8)

b) Explain the working principle of thermocouple (4)

c) Write about Temperature Scales (3)

9 a) Explain the construction and working of Platinum Resistance

Thermometer (7)

b) Explain the working principle of thermister (4)

c) Define i) Flow rate ii) Flow Volume (4)

10 a) Explain the construction and working of Rotameter (7)

b) Explain the working of Venturimeter (6)

c) Define Vena-Contracta (2)

* * * * * * * * * * * * *

Page 122: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engg

Subject IC303: Digital Electronics & Applications

Contact Hrs: 4 Hrs per week Contact Hrs per Sem: 64 Hrs

GENERAL EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES

1 To appreciate the need for memory devices and understand various

semiconductor memories

2 To understand the various display devices and PAL systems

3 To know the significance of Digital to Analog Converters

4 To know the significance of Analog to Digital Converters

5 To understand application of Digital Devices in Microprocessors.

SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES No of Hrs

1 Semiconductor Memories 10 1.1 Different types of semiconductor memories

1.2 Internal organization of static and dynamic RAM cell

1.3 Internal organization of ROM

1.4 Different types of ROM- ROM, EPROM, EEPROM,

FLASH ROM, NVRAM

1.5 Terms Access time ,speed, capacity of RAM & ROM

1.6 List the different RAM & ROM IC's and their capacity

1.7 Distinguish between single-in-line and dual-in-line memory module

1.8 Synchronous- DRAM, DDRSDRAM, RDRAM

1.9 Programmable ROM(PROM), EPROM, EEPROM, Flash ROM

1.10 Page mode access and extended data out DRAM

1.11 Refreshing of DRAM

2 Display Devices and PAL Systems 10

2.1 Operation of LED and concept of seven segment display

2.2 Alphanumeric /matrix display

2.3 LCD and its types

2.4 Dynamic scattering type and field effect type

2.5 List the advantages and disadvantages of LCD's

2.6 Compare between LED's and LCD's

2.7 LED driver using IC 7447 decoder

2.8 Multiplexed displays

2.9 7 segment decoder/driver for LCD display using IC 4543B

2.10 Introduction to PAL - Explain the basic structure and working of

PAL

2.11 Implement Full adder using PAL

Page 123: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

3 Digital to Analog converters, IC specifications 08 3.1 Classification of D/A converters

3.2 Specification of D/A Converters

3.3 Working of

3.3.1 Weighted resistor D/A Converter.

3.3.2 R-2R D/A converter,

3.3.4 Current output DAC

3.3.5 Voltage output DAC

3.4 Simple problems to be solved

3.5 Pin details DAC 0800, DAC 0808, and DAC 1408.

3.6 Application of DAC as

3.6.1 Multiplier

3.6.2 Divider

3.6.3 Programmable Integrator

4 Analog to Digital converters, IC specifications 12

4.1 Classification of A/D converters

4.2 Specification of A/D Converters

4.3 Working of

4.3.1 Counter type A/D converter.

4.3.2 Successive approximation A/D converter

4.3.3 Ramp type A/D converter

4.3.4 Dual slope A/D converter

4.3.5 Two bit flash type ADC

4.4 Simple problems to be solved

4.5 Pin details ADC 0809, ADC 0801,

4.6 List applications of ADC

5 Introduction to Microprocessors 15

5.1 Evolution of Microprocessors

5.2 Organization of microprocessor based System

5.3 Architecture Details of 8085

5.4 Pin Details of 8085

5.5 Addressing Modes of 8085

5.6 Instruction Sets of 8085

5.7 Timing Diagrams

5.8 Simple Programs

5.9 Architecture of 8086

5.9 Block diagram of motherboard of PC

5.10 Comparison of different microprocessors 8086, 80386, 80486 and

Pentium

6 Industrial Innovations 05

Student should be encouraged to collect information of Memory devices,

Display devices, PAL systems, Converters, Microprocessors and their

applications. Documentation may be made on the collected topics

Page 124: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engg

Subject IC303: Digital Electronics and Applications

Third Semester

Contact Hrs: 4 Hrs per week Contact Hrs per Sem: 64 Hrs

Chapter

No Title

No

of Hrs

Weightage

of Marks

1 Semi Conductor Memories 10 26

2 Display Devices & PAL Systems 10 26

3 Digital to Analog Converters 08 21

4 Analog to Digital Converters 12 32

5 Introduction to Microprocessors 15 40

6 Innovative Applications 05

7 Tests and Assignments 04

Total 64 145

CONTENTS No of Hours

1 Semiconductor Memories 10

RAM and ROM Types. Access Time, Speed, Capacity of RAM and ROM

RAM and ROM IC’s and their capacities. SIMM and DIMM. Synchronous

RAM’s, Programmable ROMS, Page mode Access, extended data out

DRAM. Refreshing of DRAM

2 Display Devices and PAL Systems 10

Operation of LED, LCD, 7 Segment display, LED types, LCD Types

Advantages, disadvantages of LCD and LED. LED driver.

7447 decoder. Multiplexer display. LCD display, IC 4543B

PAL system, implementation of PAL

3 Digital to Analog Converters 08

Introduction to DAC, Specification, Classifications, working of DAC.

Simple Problems. Pin details of 0800, 0808 DAC 1408. Applications

Page 125: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

4 Analog to Digital Converters 12

Introduction to ADC, Specification, Classifications, working of ADC.

Simple Problems. Pin details of 0809, 0801ADC. Applications

5 Microprocessors 15

Introduction to Microprocessor, Organization, Evolution, Architecture of 8085

µP, pin diagram, addressing modes, instruction sets, Timing diagram, Simple

Programs of 8085. Architecture of 8086, Block diagram of mother board of a

PC, comparison of different microprocessors, operating system – BIOS and

DOS

6 Industrial Innovations 05

REFERENCES:

1 Digital Electronics Principles and Integrated Circuits: Anil K Maini Wiley Precise

2 Digital Systems - By TOCCI R. J. PHI

3 Digital Electronics - By A. P. Godse

4 Fundamentals of Digital circuits - Anand Kumar PHI

5 Digital Electronics - By D. C. Green

6 Digital Electronics and Logic Design - By B. Somanathan Nair

7 Digital Principles: Floyd

8. Advance Microprocessor by K Shashidhar,Sapna Publications

9 Microprocessor and Applications: B Ram

10 Microprocessor and Applications: A P Mathur

11IBM PC and Clones: Rajesh Hongal (E P B P)

12..The 8085 Microprocessor By K Udayakumar & B S Umashankar (Pearson)

Pattern of Question Paper

Chapter

No Particulars No of Hrs

Section I

Fill in the Blanks 05

5 Short Notes 05

Section II

1 Semi Conductor Memories 10

2 Display Devices & PAL Systems 10

3 Digital to Analog Converters 04

Section III

3 Digital to Analog Converters 04

4 Analog to Digital Converters 06

Section IV

Page 126: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

4 Analog to Digital Converters 06

5 Introduction to Microprocessors 15

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engg

Subject: Digital Electronics and Applications

Third Semester

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Instructions

1) Section I is compulsory.

2) Answer any two full questions from Section II, III, IV.

3) Maximum Marks 100

SECTION I

1 a) Fill in the Blanks (1 * 5 = 5)

i) No of Comparators required for 2 Bit flash type ADC is _ _ _ _ _ .

ii) L C D stands for _ _ _ _ _ _ _

iii) Address width of 8085µp is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

iv) No of flags present in 8085µp is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

v) Storing data in memory is called _ _ _ _ _ _ _

b) Write a note on evolution of Microprocessors (5)

SECTION II

2 a) With a neat diagram explain the internal structure of RAM (7)

b) Define the terms i) Access Time. ii) Memory Capacity (4)

c) Explain SIMM and DIMM (4)

3 a) Mention the classification of ROM. Explain EPROM (7)

b ) Write a note on ROM (5)

c) Explain Dynamic Refresh in D RAM (3)

4 a) With a neat diagram explain 7 segment display using 7447 decoder (7)

b) Compare LED and LCD (4)

c) Implement full Adder using PAL (4)

Page 127: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

SECTION III

5 a) Define the following with respect to D A C

i)) Resolution ii) Montonicity (4)

b) With a neat diagram explain R – 2R network method of D A C (7)

c) Write the pin details of D A C 0800 (4)

6 a) With neat diagram explain Successive Approximation Method

of A D C (7)

b) List the applications of A D C (4)

c) Write the Pin details of A D C 0801 (4)

7 a) Write the Pin diagram of D A C 0808 (4)

b) Explain flash type A D C (7)

c) List the specifications of A D C (4)

SECTION IV

8 a) With a neat diagram explain LCD Decoder Driver (7)

b) Explain Flag Registers of 8085 µp (4)

c) Write a program to Add two 8 bit numbers (4)

9 a) Explain the pin diagram of INTEL 8085 (7)

b) Write a note on LCD (4)

c) Define i) Fetch Cycle ii) Read Cycle (4)

10 a) With a neat diagram explain the Multiplexed display device (7)

b) List the addressing modes of 8085 (4)

c) Explain the following instructions with respect to 8085

i) C M A ii) ADI 03 (4)

* * * * * * * * * * *

Page 128: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller
Page 129: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of technical education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Enng.

Third Semester

Subject IC 305: Process Instrumentation lab

Contact Hrs / week: 4hrs Contact hrs / Sem: 96hrs General objective:

After the completion of the lab student must be able to

1) Write the specifications of Instruments used in Lab

2) Calibrate and Measure various physical parameters using trainer modules

3) Write the Instrumentation Symbols

Part-A

Instrumentation Symbols No of Hrs

General Instrumentation Symbols - Instrument line symbols

Ballons, Control valve body symbols

Actuators symbol, Self actuated regulator &Valves ie Flow, Level, Pressure current, Actuator, Temperature, Voltage, Current, Flow rate. 15

To familiar with the specifications of various transducers

To study the performance of proportional –Integral controller (PI) 03

To study the performance of proportional-Derivative controller (PD) 03

To study the performance of proportional-Derivative-Integral Controller (PID) 03

Part-B

Graded Exercises

1 To plot the characteristics of Thermister Transducer 03

2 To plot the characteristics of Thermocouple Transducer 03

3 To plot the characteristics of LDR Transducer 03

4 Measurement of Temperature using Thermister Transducer 06

5 Measurement of Temperature using Resistance temperature detector (RTD) 03

6 Measurement of Temperature using Thermocouple Transducer 03

7 Measurement of displacement using LDR Transducer 03

8 Measurement of displacement using LVDT Transducer 06

9 Measurement of displacement using Resistive Transducer 03

10 Measurement of displacement using Capacitive Transducer 03

11 Measurement of PH of a given solution using PH meter 03

12 Measurement of pressure using pressure sensor 03

13 Measurement of Strain using strain gauge 06

Page 130: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

14 Measurement of Liquid level using capacitive method 03

15 Construction of proportional & integral controller using Op-amp 06

Tests and Assignments 06

MINIPROJECT (Not For Exam)

Design and rig up a signal conditioner to translate the output of

AD590, Thermister and thermocouple to 0 – 5 V 09

Total 96

SCHEME OF VALUATION:

Sl. No. Particulars Marks

1 Record 05

2 PART A

Writing 10

3

Part B

Writing circuit diagram, Tabular column, Expected Graph

& Calculations

20

4 Construction & Conduction 35

5 Result 10

6 Viva 20

Total 100

REFERENCES

1) Electronic Instruments and Instrument Technology: M M S Anand (PHI)

Page 131: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engg

Third Semester

Subject IC306: Signal Conditioners & Data Converters Lab

Contact Hrs / week: 06 Hrs Contact Hrs / Sem: 96 Hrs

General Educational Objectives

After the completion of the laboratory work the student should be able to

1) To construct & demonstrate various Signal Conditioning & Data Conversion

Circuits

2) Do simple Mini Projects.

Graded Exercises \

Construct and demonstrate the following Circuits using Op-Amp µA 741

No of Hrs

1) To measure the following op-amp parameters

a) i/p offset voltage b) i/p offset current c) CMRR d) PSRR 06

2) i) Zero Crossing detector iii) Comparator 03

3) i) Inverting amplifier ii) Non inverting amplifier 06

4) i) Summing amplifier ii) Difference amplifier 06

5) i) Integrator ii) Differentiator 06

6) Current to Voltage converter 03

7) Voltage to Current Converter 03

8) 4 Bit binary weighted resistor voltage output DAC for

0 – 5 V and 0 – 10 V 06

9) 4 Bit binary weighted resistor DAC for current output 03

10) 4 Bit R - 2R Ladder Network DAC for voltage output of

0-5 V & 0-10 V 06

Page 132: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

11) 4 Bit R - 2R Ladder Network DAC for current output 03

12) To Study the working of following IC’s

i) DAC 0800 ii) DAC 0808 06

13) To study the working of following IC’s

i) ADC 0809 ii) ADC 0801 06

14) Construction and testing of frequency multiplier using IC NE 565 06

15) Mini Project -A Competency based approach to build an application 21

[

Test and Assignments 06

Total Hrs 96

SCHEME OF VALUATION

S NO Particulars Marks

1 RECORD 05

2 Writing Circuit Diagram, Tabulation, Expected Graph,

Calculation (2 Expts) 25

3 Construction and Conduction ( One) 40

4 Result 10

5 Viva – Voce 20

Total 100

Reference Books:

1) Analog Electronics: L K Maheshwari & M M S Anand

2) Op Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits: Ramakanth A Gayakwad

3) Op Amp and Linear IC’s: David Bell

Page 133: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engineering

Fourth semester

Subject IC401: Electrical and Electronic Measurements

Contact Hours/ week: 04 Contact hours / sem: 64

Chapter

no.

Contents No. of

hours

Marks

weight age

1 Units, Dimensions and Standards 03 08

2 Errors in Measurements 03 08

3 Failures of Instruments 03 08

4 Measuring Instruments 20 52

5 Digital Instruments 05 12

6 Measurement of Resistance, Inductance

and Capacitance using Bridges

05 12

7 Cathode ray oscilloscope 09 24

8 Signal generators and analyzers 08 21

9 Industrial Innovations 05

10 Tests and Assignments 04

11 TOTAL 64 145

Chapter no. Contents No. of hours

Section II

1 Units, Dimensions and Standards 03

2 Errors in Measurements 03

3 Failures of Instruments 03

5 Measuring of R, L, C using Bridges 05

Section III

4 Measuring Instruments 20

5 Digital Instruments 05

Section IV

6 Cathode Ray Oscilloscope 09

7 Signal Generators and analyzers 08

Page 134: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

General objectives

1. To Understand dimensions and standards

2. Appreciate the basic concepts of measuring instruments

3. To Study failures in Instruments and its remedies

4. Know the working of voltmeters and Ammeters

5. Comprehend the constructional details and working principles of hot wire,

wattmeter and Energy meter, Megger, current and potential transformer

6. Appreciate the need for calibration

7. Understand the measurement of R, L, C using bridges

8. To appreciate the working of Multimeters

9. Comprehend the working and applications of CRO

10. To Understand the working Principle of Signal generators and Analyzers

Details of contents

1 Units, Dimensions and standards 03

Units, Dimensions, Standards and types

2 Errors in Measurements 03

Error Definition and types of errors, method of eliminating errors

3 Failure of Instruments 03

Types and causes, Faults and symptoms, MTR, MTBF, Maintenance policy

4 Measuring Instruments 20

Moving coil and Moving iron Ammeters and voltmeters, calibration of ammeter and

voltmeter, Megger, Hotwire instrument, Energy meter, wattmeter and types, Electronic

Multimeter

5 Digital Instruments 05

Multimeters, Voltmeters, LCR meter, Frequency meter

6 Measurement of Resistance, capacitance and inductance using Bridges 05

DC Bridge: Wheatstone bridge, AC Bridge: Maxwell’s Bridge, Schering Bridge, Q-meter

7 Cathode Ray Oscilloscope 09

Block diagram, types, measurements and applications

8 Signal Generators and Analyzers 08

Signal generators and types, Types of Wave analyzers and its application

9 Industrial Innovations 05

Page 135: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engineering

Fourth semester

Subject IC401: Electrical and Electronic Measurements

Specific Instructional objectives

1. Units, Dimensions and Standards 03

1.1 Definition of Units

1.2 Absolute unit

1.3 Fundamental and derived units

1.4 Discuss SI units

1.5 Definition of Dimensions for force, work , power

1.5 Definition of Standard

1.6 Classification of standards- International, Primary, secondary, working standards

2 Errors in Measurements 03

2.1 Define Error

2.2 Understand the types of errors: Gross, systematic, Random errors

2.3 Explain the sources and elimination of errors

3 Failures of Instruments 03

3.1 Study the types and causes of failures in instruments

3.2 Study the faults and symptoms

3.3 Describe mean time between failures and write the factors that determine MTBF

3.4 Describe mean time to repair and write the factors that determine MTR

3.5 Appreciate the need for maintenance policy- preventive & corrective maintenance

4 Measuring Instruments 20

4.1 List the types of measuring instruments

4.2 Know the Principle, construction, working, advantage & disadvantage, applications

of the following

4.2.1 Moving Iron Instruments: Attraction type, Repulsion type, list the errors

4.2.2 Moving coil Instruments: PMMC, Dynamometer, list the errors

4.2.3 Extension of Range: DC Ammeter, DC voltmeter

4.2.4 Calibration of AC and DC Ammeter, voltmeter

4.2.4 Megger

4.2.5 Hot wire Instrument

4.2.6 Wattmeter: Dynamometer type, Induction type

4.2.7 Energy meter: Induction type watt hour meter

4.2.8 Working Principle of Electronic Multimeter

Page 136: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

5 Digital Instruments 05

5.1 Know the construction and working of the following instruments

5.1.1 Digital Multimeter

5.1.2 Voltmeter

5.1.3 LCR meter

5.1.4 Digital frequency meter

6 Measurement of Resistance, capacitance and inductance using Bridges 05

5.1 Introduction: List the different types of DC and AC bridges, List the Detectors

5.2 DC bridge:-Measurement of Resistance using Wheatstone bridge

5.3 AC bridge- General form of AC bridge

5.3.1 Measurement of capacitance using Schering Bridge

5.3.2 Measurement of Inductance using Maxwell’s bridge

7 Cathode Ray Oscilloscope 09

7.1 Block diagram of CRO: Function of each block

7.2 know the working of Cathode Ray Tube

7.3 Understand the working of Horizontal amplifier and Vertical amplifier

7.4 Study the importance of Time base (sweep or Ramp) generator and Delay line

7.5 Briefly know the working of Dual beam oscilloscope and Digital storage oscilloscope

7.6 CRO measurements: Explain voltage, period, current, frequency, amplitude,

Lissajous figures

8 Signal Generators and Analyzers 08

8.1 Explain the principle and operation of the following with block diagram

8.1.1 Signal generator

8.1.2 Function generator

8.1.3 Pulse and square generator

8.1.4 Heterodyne wave analyzer, applications

8.1.5 Spectrum Analyzer, applications

9 Industrial Innovations 05

The students should collect Specifications of latest measuring equipments in

Instrumentation field

Page 137: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Reference books:

1. Electronics Instrumentation and measurements, K Shashidhar, Sapna Publishers

2. Electrical & Electronic measurements Instrumentation S chand publication RK

Rajput

3. Modern Electronic Instrumentation & measurement techniques PHI William D

Cooper

4. Electronic Instruments and systems Principle, maintenance, troubleshooting RG

Gupta

5. Electronic Instrumentation by HS Kalsi

6. Electrical measurements and measuring Instruments by AK Sawhney

7 Electronic Instrumentation & Measurement: (E B P) T G Katewal

8 Electronic instruments and Instrumentation technology MMS Anand

Page 138: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engineering

Fourth semester

Subject: Electrical and Electronic Measurements

Model Question Paper

Note: 1) Section I is compulsory.

2) Answer any two full questions from Sections II, III and IV

3) Max Marks: 100

Section I

1 a. Fill in the blanks 1 x 5 =5

(i) PMMC is used for the measurement of ___ quantity

(ii) Maxwell bridge is used to measure ___

(iii) A multimeter is often called as __ meter

(iv) Gross errors are also called as ___ errors

(v) Wave Analyzer is also called as ______

1 b Write a short note on Megger 5

Section II

2(a) Explain the Gross Error, Systematic Error & How to eliminate them 7

2(b) Define Standard? Explain different Types of Standards 6

2 (c) Define Unit 2

3 (a) Derive an expression for the Unknown Capacitance using bridge method &

Explain 7

3 (b) Explain Resistance measurement using Wheatstone bridge 5

3 (c) Explain corrective Maintenance 3

4(a) Explain the working of Digital frequency meter 7

4(b) Write a short note on MTR and MTBF 5

4(c) Write the block diagram of Digital voltmeter 3

Page 139: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Section III

5(a) Explain the construction and working of PMMC 8

5(b) Write the advantage of moving iron instruments 4

5(c) Write the applications of Hotwire instruments 3

6(a) Explain the construction and working of Hotwire instruments 8

6(b) List the disadvantages of Induction type Dynamometer 4

6(c) List the application of Induction type instruments 3

7(a) Explain construction & working of repulsion type moving iron instrument 8

7(b) How do you extend the range of an ammeter 5

7(c) List the sources of error in PMMC 2

Section IV

8(a) Explain the block diagram of CRO 8

8(b) Explain the function of delay line CRO with diagram 5

8(c) List the applications of CRO 2

9(a) Explain the working of Heterodyne wave analyzer 7

9(b) Write short note on Lissajous figures 5

9(c) List the applications of spectrum analyzers 3

10(a) Explain the working of Signal generator 7

10(b) Write the block diagram of Function generator 4

10(c) Explain time and frequency measurement using CRO 4

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

Page 140: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engineering

Fourth semester

Subject IC 404: Electronic Measurements Lab

Contact Hours / week: 6 Contact hours / Sem: 96 hours

General Objectives

After the completion of the lab student must be able to

1) Measure Resistance, Inductance & Capacitance using DC & AC bridges

2) Construct and Demonstrate Voltage regulators

3) Measure Single phase power and Frequency

4) Troubleshoot simple electronic circuits

5) Write the Specifications of Various Measuring Instruments

6) Write & Explain the Block diagram of Testing Instruments Specified in the

Syllabus

Study Exercises No of Hrs

Part A 21

1) To study the working of the following

(i) IC Tester, (ii) Logic probe, (iii) Logic pulser, (iv) Logic current tracer

2) Installation manual

3) Safety measures against electrical and mechanical hazards

4) To write the specifications of the following measuring instruments

(i) Multimeter (ii) CRO (iii) Signal Generator (iv) Power Supplies

Part B

Construct and conduct the following experiments

1) Measurement of Unknown Resistance using Wheatstone bridge 03

2) Measurement of Unknown Capacitance using Schering’s bridge 03

3) Measurement of Unknown Inductance using Maxwell’s bridge 03

4) Measurement of Q-factor of coil 03

5) Construction of Series voltage regulator to determine line and load

Regulation 03

6) Construction of Shunt voltage regulator to determine line and load

Regulation 03

7) IC voltage regulator 7805, LM 723, LM 317 09

8) Determination of Unknown frequency by comparison method 03

9) Measurement of power in a single phase circuit 03

Page 141: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

10) Determination of Inductance of a coil by AVW method 03

11) Create fault and troubleshoot the following circuits

(i) Single stage RC coupled amplifier (ii) Regulated power supply 15

(iii) Monostable and Astable multivibrator

12) Mini project – A competency based approach to build an application 18

13) Tests and Assignments 06

Total 96

Note:

a. Faults may be created by (i) removal of components (ii) replacement of

components by higher or lower value (iii) replacing defective components

b. Fault should be Listed and remedial action taken must be noted

Scheme of Valuation

Sl

no. Particulars Marks

1 Lab record 05

2 Part A ( Writing work ) 10

3 Writing circuit diagram, Tabular column & waveform , calculations 20

4 Construction and conduction 35

5 Result 10

6 Viva voce 20

Total 100

Page 142: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma course in Electronic Instrumentation and control engineering

Fourth semester

Subject IC 403: Instrumentation Technology and Communication

Contact Hours/ week: 04 Contact hours / sem: 64

Chapter

no.

Contents No. of

hours

Marks

weightage

1 Elements of Design 09 25

2 Grounding and Shielding 06 16

3 Metrology 07 17

4 Standards in Quality Management 04 10

5 Instrumentation in Hazardous areas 10 27

6 Modulation and Demodulation 07 19

7 Data communication and networking 12 31

8 Industrial Innovations 05

9 Tests and Assignments 04

Total 64 145

Chapter no. Contents No. of hours

Section II

1 Elements of Design 09

4 Standards in Quality management 04

6 Modulation and Demodulation 07

Section III

2 Grounding and Shielding 06

5 Instrumentation in Hazardous areas 10

Section IV

3 Metrology 07

7 Data communication and networking 12

General objectives

1. Know the basic concepts of Design in Instrumentation

2. Study the concepts of Grounding and Shielding

3. Understand testing, compatibility, calibration and traceability in Metrology

4. Know the standards in Total quality management

5. Know the Hazardous area in Instrumentation

6. Know the concept of communication

7. Know the concepts of Data communication and Networking

Page 143: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Details of contents

1 Elements of Design 09

Product Life cycle, Circuit design and layout, Assembly and inspection, Testing and

calibration, Power distribution, wiring and cabling, Integrated testing, Enclosures,

Documentation

2 Grounding and Shielding 06

Grounding- concepts and illustration with examples, shock hazard protection,

shielding:- Guidelines and examples, protection from electrostatic discharge

3 Metrology 07

Introduction, SI units, Testing, compatibility, calibration and traceability

4 Standards in Quality management 04

ISO 9000 QMS architecture, Quality, TQM, other QMS

5 Instrumentation in Hazardous areas 10

Introduction, Hazardous area classification, intrinsically safe design, Relevant Indian

standards

6 Modulation and Demodulation 07

Introduction, types of modulation: AM, FM, PM, Limitations of Amplitude

modulation, comparison of AM & FM, Demodulation, need for Demodulation

7 Data Communication and Computer Network 12

Introduction, Transmission Media, Multiplexing, switching, Computer Networks,

Network Topologies, Network Devices.

8 Industrial Innovations 05

9 Tests and Assignments 04

Page 144: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engineering

Fourth semester

Subject IC 403: Instrumentation Technology and Communication

Contact Hours/ week: 04 Contact hours / sem: 64

Specific Instructional objectives

1. Elements of Design 09

1.1 Introduction

1.2 Product life cycle – Need / Opportunity, Concept development, Product design,

Manufacturing Process design .

1.3 Circuit design – Outline of requirements, General Issues – Selection of

Technology Reliability, Fault tolerance, High speed design , Low power design

Noise & Error budgets, I/O interface

1.4 Circuit layout – Component Placement, Routing signal traces, Grounds, Returns

Shields, Connectors

1.5 Assembly and Inspection

1.6 Testing and calibration

1.7 Power Distribution

1.8 Wiring and cabling , Cooling,

1.9 Aesthetics, Ergonomics, Serviceability, Regulations & Standards

1.10 Integrated Testing & Documentation

2 Grounding and Shielding 06

2.1 Introduction

2.2 Grounding

2.2.1 The concept of ‘ Earth’ Ground

2.2.2 Illustration of typical power supply grounding error

2.2.3 Some examples of current return path symbols

2.2.4 Shock Hazard protection using earth , ground

2.2.5 Grounding considerations

2.2.6 Basic grounding practices- Circuit grounding, Ground bus ,Ground Plane

2.2.7 Examples

2.3 Shielding

2.3.1 Practical guidelines

2.3.2 Examples

2.4 Protection from electrostatic discharge – Sources of Electrostatic Discharge,

Typical electrostatic voltages & Precautions

Page 145: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

3 Metrology 07

3.1 Introduction

3.2 SI units – Base Units

3.3 Testing, compatibility, calibration and Traceability

3.3.1 Explain Testing, compatibility, calibration, Traceability

3.3.2 Measuring equipment cycle

3.3.3 Measurement error and measurement uncertainty – Components of

Uncertainty

3.3.4 Determining instrument capability

3.3.5 Meeting test specifications

3.3.6 Test procedures

3.3.7 Reliability and performance metrics

3.3.8 National Accreditation Board of approved laboratories (NABAL)

3.39 Difference between Accuracy & Precision

4 Standards in Quality Management 04

4.1 Introduction

4.2 ISO 9000 Quality Management system and Architecture of ISO 9000

4.3 Quality

4.3.1 What is quality, quality policy, quality planning, quality management?

Quality System, quality control, quality assurance

4.3.2 The Deming Cycle

4.3.3 Seven Wastes

4.5 Total Quality Management (TQM) and 10 principles

4.6 Some other Quality Management Standards

4.6.1 ISO 14000

4.6.2 ISO 14001

5 Instrumentation in Hazardous areas

10 5.1 Introduction

5.2 Hazardous area classification – Class I , Class II Class IIIAreas

5.2.1 Protective Concepts – Explosion proof / Flame proof enclosures,

Intrinsic Safety, Pressurized Enclosures

5.3 Equipment Design and Construction

5.4 Intrinsically safe design

5.4.1 Determining safe energy levels

5.4.2 Intrinsic safety circuit design -Is a Thermocouple intrinsically safe

Selection of a barrier

Installing intrinsically safe systems- Wiring, Grounding ,

Barrier, Sealing, Maintenance, Troubleshooting , Barrier Replacement

5.4.4 Transformer isolation barrier (TIB)

5.5 Relevant Indian Standards

Page 146: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

6 Modulation and Demodulation 07

6.1 What is modulation?

6.2 Types of Modulation:- AM , FM, PM

6.3 Explain AM with figure

6.4 Limitations of AM

6.5 Explain FM with figure

6.6 Advantage of FM over AM

6.7 What is Demodulation?

6.8 Need for demodulation

6.9 Essentials of demodulation

6.10 Pulse modulation:- PAM, PWM , PCM

7 Data Communication and Computer Network 12

7.1 Introduction to Data Communication

7.1.1 Definition

7.1.2 Five Components of Data Communication

7.1.3 Data Transmission – Simplex, Half Duplex, Full Duplex

7.2 Transmission Media

7.2.1 Guided Media – Twisted Pair, Co-axial, Optical fiber

7.2.2 Unguided Media – Radio Frequency propagation microwave, satellite

7.3 Multiplexing

7.3.1 Frequency Division Multiplexing (F D M)

7.3.2 Time Division Multiplexing (T D M)

7.4 Switching

7.4.1 Circuit Switching

7.4.2 Packet Switching

7.4.3 Message Switching

7.5 Computer Networks

7.5.1 Local Area Network (LAN)

7.5.2 Metro Area Network (MAN)

7.5.3 Wide Area Network (WAN)

7.6 Network Topologies – Working, Advantages & Disadvantages

7.6.1 BUS

7.6.2 RING

7.6.3 STAR

7.6.4 TREE

7.6.5 MESH

7.7 Network Devices

7.7.1 Network Interface Card (NIC)

7.7.2 Hub

7.7.3 Repeater

7.7.4 Bridge

7.7.5 Router

6.7.6 Gateway

7 Industrial Innovations 05

Student should be encouraged to collect information regarding design, quality aspects, hazardous areas in Instrumentation and in Computer

Networking

Redesign front panel Of Lab Instruments based on Ergonomics & Aesthetics

Page 147: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Documentation may be made on the collected topics

Reference books

1. Data Communication and Networking, K Shashidhar, Sapna Publishers

2. Electronic Instruments and Instrumentation technology PHI MMS Anand

3. PC Based Instrumentation ( PHI) N Mathivanan

4 Data Communication and Networking E P B P Renuka Ambeiger

5 Introduction to Computer Science Pearson Education – ITL Education Solution

Ltd.

6 Principles of Electronics –S Chand Publications: V K Mehta

Page 148: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engineering

Fourth semester

Subject: Instrumentation Technology and Communication

Model Question Paper

Note: Section I is compulsory.

Answer any two Full questions from SECTIONII, III & IV

Section I

1 a. Fill in the blanks 1 x 5 =5

(i) Passive cooling is achieved by means of a ___

(ii) WAN stands for ___

(iii) ISO____ is an environmental management standard

(iv) The term __ refers to a current return path through the earth

(v) Seals are required to prevent the transmission of __ and vapors from

Hazardous area to non- hazardous area

1 b Explain the elements of concept development 5

Section II

2(a) Draw the flowchart showing the decision making process based upon the inter-

relationship of design, production, economics 8

2 (b) What are the general issues in the circuit design 4

2 (c) List the factors which characterizes the aesthetics of a product 3

3 (a) What is modulation. Explain Amplitude modulation with figure 8

3 (b) Compare FM and AM 5

3(c) Define Ergonomics. 2

4(a) What is demodulation. Explain the limitations of amplitude modulation 7

4(b) What are seven wastes in domain of quality 4

4(c) Explain the Deming cycle of Quality control 4

Page 149: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Section III

5(a) What is grounding? Draw the diagrams of common return, chassis return and

Ground return 8

5(b) List the sources of electrostatic discharge 5

5(c) Why shielding is required 2

6(a) Explain Ignition triangle. What are the sources of Ignition? How Ignition can

be prevented 8

6(b) List the Hazardous area classifications 5

6(c) What is meant by Intrinsic safety 2

7(a) Explain how can the circuit of a thermocouple be made intrinsically safe in

Hazardous area 8

7(b) What are the considerations for sealing intrinsically safe systems 5

7(c) What are the advantages of transformer isolation barrier 2

Section IV

8(a) What is meant by measurement uncertainty? Classify the components of

Uncertainty 7

8(b) What are basic elements of a calibration program 4

8(c) Explain graphically the difference between accuracy and precision 4

9(a) Explain any three Guided media data transmission 9

9(b) Compare LAN and MAN 4

9(c) What is router 2

10(a) Explain the following network devices:- Hub, NIC, repeater 9

10(b) Compare FDM and TDM 4

10(c) What is Full duplex 2

* * * * * * * * * * * * * *

Page 150: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Department of Technical Education

Diploma course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engineering

Fourth semester

Subject IC 405: Microcontroller Lab

Contact Hours / week: 6 Contact hours / sem: 96 hours

Graded exercises

Section A No of Hours

Write and execute the following 8051 programs 60

1) Program to ADD two 8 bit signed and Unsigned numbers

2) Program to ADD series of N, 8 bit numbers

3) Program to ADD two Multibyte numbers

4) Program to convert two digit Packed BCD to Unpacked BCD

5) Program to convert Unpacked BCD to two digit Packed BCD

6) Program to convert two digit BCD to Gray code

7) Program to convert two digit BCD to excess 3 code

8) Program to convert two digit BCD to ASCII code

9) Program to convert ASCII to two digit BCD code

10) Program to perform two 8 bit multiplication

11) Program to perform two 8 bit Division

12) Program to separate positive and negative numbers in a series of N bytes

13) Program to count number of ones and zeros in an 8 bit data

14) Program to find the smallest number in a series of N byte

15) Program to find the largest number in a series of N byte

16) Program to generate a specific time delay

17) Program to find factorial of a number ( less than 5)

18) Program to arrange a series of numbers in ascending order

Page 151: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

19) Program to arrange a series of numbers in descending order

20) Program to search a specified number in a given array of numbers

Section B (Any five) 30 Hours

1) Program to Interface LED & Switch

2) Program to Interface a seven segment display

3) Program to interface 4 x 4 keypad

4) Program to count the number of times a key is being pressed and to display the

count

5) Program to generate four different buzzer sounds when corresponding key is

pressed

6) Program to generate moving light display using at least 8 LEDs

7) Program to interface traffic light control

8) Program to Interface stepper motor

Tests and Assignment 6 Hours

Note: The student must draw the flowchart for all the programs

The student must write & execute all the programs from section A

The student can do any five interfacing programs from section B

Mini Project – A competency based approach to build an application

Scheme of Valuation

Sl

no.

Particulars Marks

1 Lab record 05

2 Writing two program 30

3 Entering and Execution(one program) 35

4 Result / Print out 10

5 Viva voce 20

Total 100

Page 152: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engineering

Fourth semester

Subject IC402: Microcontroller and Applications

Contact Hours/ week: 04 Contact hours / sem: 64

Chapter

no.

Contents No. of

hours

Marks

waitage

1 Introduction to microcontroller 03 09

2 Architecture of 8051 05 15

3 Program development tools 02 06

4 Instruction set of 8051 10 25

5 Hardware features of 8051 and

programming

15 42

6 Interfacing devices 08 18

7 Applications of 8051 12 30

8 Industrial Innovations 05

9 Tests and Assignments 04

Chapter no. Contents No. of hours

Section II

1 Introduction to microcontroller 03

2 Architecture of 8051 05

4 Instruction set of 8051 10

Section III

3 Program development tools 02

5 Hardware features of 8051 and programming 15

Section IV

6 Interfacing devices 08

7 Applications of 8051 12

General objectives

To Understand the concept of microcomputer and microcontroller

Study the architectural details of Intel 8051 microcontroller

Know the difference between RISC and CISC processors architecture

Study instruction set of 8051

To Learn the Concept of programming in 8051

To understand Timers ,Interrupts & Serial communication in 8051

Develop simple applications using 8051

Page 153: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Details of contents

1 Introduction to microcontrollers 03

Evolution of microcontrollers

Block diagram of microcontroller

Microcontroller types, RISC and CISC processors, Harvard & Princeton architectures

memory types

2 Architecture of 8051 06

Architecture, different types of registers and register banks, Stack & Stack pointer, I/o

ports, Memories, pin diagram

3 Program development tools 02

Definitions and different tools, assembler directives

4 Instruction set of 8051 10

Instruction format and its classification with examples, addressing modes

5 Hardware features of 8051 and programming 10

I/o port and its programming, Timer / counter, timer registers and operating modes,

Interrupts and Interrupt registers, Serial communication and registers

6 Interfacing devices and Bus standards 10

Memory Mapping

Study the following ICs 8255, 8251,8253,8257,8259

7 Applications of 8051 12

Interfacing of LED, Buzzer, Relay, ADC, DAC, Hex keypad, seven segment display,

stepper motor, traffic control

8 Industrial Innovations 05

9 Tests and Assignments 04

Page 154: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Department of Technical Education

Diploma course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engineering

Fourth semester

Subject IC402: Microcontroller and Applications

Contact Hours/ week: 04 Contact hours / sem: 64

Specific Instructional objectives

1. Introduction to Microcontrollers 03

1.1 Evolution of microcontrollers

1.2 Study the block diagram of microcontroller

1.3 Know the different types of Microcontrollers

1.4 Differentiate the RISC and CISC architectures

1.5 Understand the concepts of Embedded and External memory

2 Architecture of 8051 05

2.1 Study the Architectural details of 8051

2.2 Know the different types of registers like PSW, DPTR, SFRs, and register banks

2.3 Understand the operation of stack and stack pointer

2.4 Study the different I/O ports

2.5 Know the concept of memory organization

2.6 Study the pin details of 8051

3 Program development tools 02

3.1 Define: Instruction, program, software

3.2 Study all the assembler directives of 8051

3.3 Describe program development tools: assembler, loader, Linker, compiler

3.4 Describe flowchart, algorithm

4 Instruction set of 8051

4.1 Explain instruction format 10

4.2 Classify the 8051 instruction set

4.3 Learn the syntax and function of each instruction with example

4.4 Understand Data transfer, arithmetic, Logic, looping and conditional instructions

5 Hardware features of 8051 and programming 15

5.1 Define I/o port,

5.2 know I/o port bit addressability, I/o port programming

5.3 Know Bit addressable RAM, single bit operations with carry, Reading and

writing I/o pins

5.4 Understand Timer/ counter 8051, Timer registers TMOD and TCON

5.5 Study the different modes: Mode 1, Mode 2 and counter programming

5.6 Define Interrupt and know the Interrupt priority

5.7 Understand Interrupts versus polling, ISR, Enabling and Disabling interrupts

5.8 Understand interrupt registers IE & IP, Level and edge triggered interrupts

5.9 Know serial communication, baud rate, SBUF, SCON registers

5.10 Understand transmit and receive data serially, importance of TI & RI flags

Page 155: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

6 Interfacing devices 6.1 Define interface and describe the need for interface 08

6.2 Know the concepts of memory mapped I/O and I/O mapped I/O

6.3 Study the block diagrams and pin details of ICs 8255,

6.4 Know the control word register format of 8255

6.5 Understand the mode 0 operation of 8255

6.6 Study the block diagram and pin details of ICs 8251

6.7 Study the block diagram and pin details of ICs 8253

6.8 Study the block diagram and pin details of ICs 8257

6.9 Study the block diagram and pin details of ICs 8259

7 Applications of 8051 12

7.1 Study the interfacing of LED & Switch

7.2 Study the interfacing of Buzzer

7.3 Study the interfacing of Relay

7.4 Study the interfacing of ADC

7.5 Study the interfacing of DAC

7.6 Study the interfacing of Hex key pad

7.7 Study the interfacing of seven segment display

7.8 Study the interfacing of stepper motor

7.9 Study the interfacing of Traffic control

8 Industrial Innovations 05

Student should be encouraged to collect information regarding different ARM Microcontrollers & its Applications

Students should practice writing the programs in embedded C

Documentation may be made on the collected topics

Reference books

1. The 8051 microcontroller & its applications by K Shashidhar, Sapna Publishers

2. The 8051 microcontroller and embedded system by Mazidi & Mazidi

3. The 8051 microcontroller (Architecture programming and application) by K J Ayala

4. Microcontroller & Applications By Dr. Ramani Kalpathi & Ganesh Raja

(SANGUINE Publications)

5. The 8051 Microcontroller By Dr. k . Umarao & Dr. Andhe Pallavi

(SANGUINE Publications)

Page 156: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engineering

Fourth semester

Subject: Microcontroller and Applications

Model Question Paper

Note: Section I is compulsory.

Answer any two Full questions from SECTIONS II, III & IV

Max Marks: 100

Section I

1 a. Fill in the blanks 1 x 5 =5

(i) Stack pointer is __ bit wide

(ii) The 8051 has ___ number of interrupts

(iii) TMOD register of 8051 is ___ bit wide

(iv) ___ bits of PSW registers are used to select register banks

(v) SBUF register is used for ___ communication

1 b Explain the concept of Embedded and External memory 5

Section II

2(a) Explain the architecture of Intel 8051 with block diagram 9

2 (b) Differentiate between RISC and CISC Architecture 4

2 (c) What is stack 2

3 (a) Explain the function of following Instructions DAA, Swap A, RLC, ORA 8

3 (b) List the Single bit instructions 5

3(c) Define Instruction 2

4(a) Write the functional pin diagram of 8051 and explain 7

4(b) Explain branch instructions in 8051 4

4(c) Explain Push and Pop instructions with example 4

Section III

5(a) Explain the operation of I/O ports in 8051 8

5(b) Draw the format of TMOD register 4

5(c) Give the importance of TI flags 3

6(a) Explain with diagram the register banks in 8051 7

Page 157: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

6(b) Explain the concept of Interrupt and Polling 4

6(c) Write a note on Assembler and Linker 4

7(a) Explain how data is transmitted and received serially in 8051 8

7(b) Write the steps in MOD 2 counter programming 5

7(c) What is the function of SBUF register 2

Section IV

8(a) Explain the block diagram of Intel 8255 8

8(b) Write the features of Intel 8257 4

8(c) Write the control word register format of 8255 3

9(a) Explain the interfacing of stepper motor with 8051 9

9(b) Explain the centronics bus standard 4

9(c) what is the need of bus standard 2

10(a) Explain the block diagram of Intel 8251 8

10(b) Explain the interfacing of LED 4

10(c) What is Full duplex 2

* * * * * * * * * * * *

Page 158: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller
Page 159: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Enng.

Third Semester

Subject IC 406: PCB & Simulation lab

Contact Hrs/week: 4hrs Contact hrs/sem: 96hrs

General Educational objectives

1 After the completion of this lab session the student shall be able to simulate

the circuit diagram of electronic circuits using software

2 Test the above circuits for their performance

3 Design PCB for the electronic circuits using software

4. Mini project – A competency based approach to build an application

PART A No of Hrs

STUDY EXERCISES 12

1 Introduction to PCB & Types

2 Details of electronic components-Sketches with dimensions

3 Layout design &general Rules

4 Art Work-Basic approaches & general rules

5 Details of Copper Clad Laminates & General rules

6 Explain the Steps involved in the Fabrication of PCB

PART B

LABORATORY EXERCISES

Study the software used in the lab 03

Draft, simulate & Design PCB for the following circuits using software

DIGITAL EXPERIMENTS

i) IC 7476 as shift register for the following operations 06

(a)SISO (b) SIPO (c) PISO (d) PIPO

ii) Decade Counter 03

iii) Ring and Johnson’s counter 06

iv) Half adder & Full adder 03

v) Multiplexer 03

vi) J-K, D and T-flip flop 06

vii) To verify the functioning of Basic gates

NAND, NOR, OR, EX-OR and EX-NOR 06

Page 160: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

ANALOG EXPERIMENTS

Draft, Simulate and design PCB for the following

i) Full wave bridge rectifier without filter to determine ripple factor 03

ii) Full wave bridge rectifier with filter to determine ripple factor 03

iii) Op-amp (µ741) as a) Inverting (b) Non-inverting amplifier 06

iv) Op-amp (µ741) as a) Summing (b) Difference amplifier 06

v) Op-amp (µ741) as a) RC phase shift oscillator

b) Wein bridge oscillator 06

vii) To draw frequency response of RC coupled Amplifier 03

viii) Astable Multivibrator using 555 timer 03

ix) 4-bit binary weighted DAC (0-5v) using µA741 06

x) 4-bit R-2R ladder Network DAC (0-5v) using µA741 06

Tests and Assignments 06

Total 96

SCHEME OF VALUATION

S No Particulars Marks

1 Record 05

2 Part A: (Writing Part) 10

3 Part B: Drafting ( Two circuits, 1 Analog & 1 Digital) 20

4 Simulation & P C B Design (One) 20 + 15 = 35

5 Result / Print out 10

6 Viva – Voce 20

Total 100

Page 161: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engineering

Fifth Semester

Subject IC 502: Bio-Medical Instrumentation

No. of hours/week: 4 No. of hours / Sem: 64

Sl No. CONTENTS No. of hours Marks

1. Introduction to Bio Medical Instrumentation 03 08

2. Bioelectric signals and electrodes 07 18

3. Recording systems 04 10

4. Measuring & Monitoring instruments for

Cardio Vascular System 10 26

5. Miscellaneous Measuring Instruments 08 22

6. Instrumentation for Clinical Laboratory 03 08

7. Physiotherapy and Electrotherapy

Equipments 04 10

8. Imaging Techniques 05 15

9. Lasers in Bio-Medical Applications 04 10

10. Electrical safety & Operating room

Instrumentation 07 18

11 Industrial Innovations 05

12 Tests & Assignments 04

TOTAL 64 145

Scheme of Studies

Chapter

No Particulars No of Hrs

Section I

Fill in the Blanks

5 & 6 Short Notes

Section II

1 Introduction to Bio Medical Instrumentation 03

2 Bioelectric signals and electrodes 07

3 Recording systems 04

7 Physiotherapy and Electrotherapy Equipments 04

Section III

4 Measuring & Monitoring instruments for

Cardio Vascular System 10

6 Instrumentation for Clinical Laboratory 03

8 Imaging Techniques 05

Section IV

5 Miscellaneous Measuring Instruments 08

9 Lasers in Biomedical applications 04

10 Electrical safety & Operating room

Instrumentation 07

Page 162: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

General Objectives:

1) Appreciate the need for Bio Medical Instrumentation

2) Know about Bio Electrical Signal & Electrodes

3) Know about Recording Systems

4) Understand the physiology of Cardio Vascular Systems

5) Know about Measuring and Monitoring Instruments

6) Appreciate the need for Clinical Laboratory Instruments

7) Appreciate the need for Physiotherapy and Electro therapy Instruments

8) Outline the Imaging Techniques

9) Know the applications of Lasers in Bio Medical Field

10) Knowledge of Operation Room Instrumentation and need for Safety of Medical

Instruments

DETAILS OF CONTENTS No of Hrs

1. INTRODUCTION TO BIO MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION 03

Introduction, Role of Bio-medical Engineer, Man-Instrument system, Problems

encountered while performing Measurement of living organisms.

2. BIOELECTRIC SIGNALS AND ELECTRODES 07

Origin of Bio-electric potentials- Resting potential, action potential.

Process of polarization, depolarization & Repolarization with typical waveform of

action potential.

Typical Bio Electric Signals – ECG, EEG, EMG, ERG (Definition)

Electrodes- micro electrode, skin surface electrode, needle electrode

Applications of electrodes.

3. RECORDING SYSTEMS 04 Block diagram of recording system, classification of recording systems

Inkjet recorder, Ultraviolet recorder, potentiometer recorder

4 MEASURING AND MONITORING INSTRUMENTS FOR THE

CARDIO-VASCULAR SYSTEM. 10

Physiology of Cardio vascular system.

Systolic and diastolic pressure, Electrocardiogram- Block Diagram and Typical

Waveform. Electrodes and Leads, 12 Standard leads, Einthoven Triangle.

Phonocardiograph. Block Diagram and Working.

Blood pressure Measurement. Direct and Indirect Method

Blood flow measurement - Electromagnetic Blood flow meter, Ultrasonic Blood

flow meter.

Principle working, applications of the following devices

Pacemaker, Defibrillator.

Plethysmograph. - Working

5 MISCELLANEOUS MEASURING INSTRUMENTS. 08

Electro Encephalograph - Types of EEG wave forms at different stages of sleep.

Building blocks of EEG recorder. 10-20 Electrode system.

Page 163: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Electromyography - Block diagram and working.

Respiratory system: Physiology. Lung Volume and Capacities.

Respiratory Therapy Equipments: Inhalators, Respirators/Ventilators.

Humidifiers, Nebulizers and Aspirators.

Working of Standard Spiro meter. Haemodializer Blood Pumps

6 INSTRUMENTATION FOR CLINICAL LABORATORY. 03

Blood – Constituents. Automatic optical method.

Electrical conductivity method (coulter blood cell counter).

7 PHYSIOTHERAPY AND ELECTROTHERAPY EQUIPMENTS. 04

Biological stimulators: Types of waveform used in stimulators.

Block diagram of Electro diagnostics/Therapeutic Stimulators.

Diathermy- Definition, Types.

8 IMAGING TECHNIQUES 05

Principle, Block diagram, working & application of following devices:

X -ray, CT scanner, MRI, Ultrasound

9 LASERS IN BIO-MEDICAL APPLCATIONS 04

Laser Principle, Ruby Laser, CO2 laser, lasers in Ophthalmology

10 ELECTRICAL SAFETY &

OPERATING ROOM INSTRUMENTATION 07

Shock Hazards- micro shock & macro shock

Physiological effects of electric current,

Leakage current- methods to reduce leakage current (isolation transformer/ optical

isolation)

Methods of accident prevention

Operating room- Table, surgical lights, anesthesia machine, vital signs monitor,

OT care.

11 INDUSTRIAL INNOVATIONS 05

REFERENCES

1) Handbook on Bio-medical Instrumentation RS Khandpur

2) Introduction to Medical Electronics SK Guha

3) Bio-medical Instruments and measurements Cromwell, Weisel

4) Bio-medical Instrumentation Armugam

5) Bio-medical Electronics Sudha Kamath

6) Bio-medical Instrumentation & electronics Geddes & Becker

7) Medical Instrumentation Application & Design Jhn G Webster (Wiley)

Page 164: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engineering

Fifth Semester

Subject IC502: Bio-Medical Instrumentation

No. of hours / week: 4 No. of hours / Sem: 64

Specific Objectives:

1. Introduction to Biomedical Instrumentation

1.1 Definition of Biomedical Instrumentation

1.2 Duties and Responsibilities of clinical Engineering and Biomedical Equipment

Technician

1.3 Objectives of an instrumentation system.

1.4 Components of man Instrumentation system.

1.5 Problems encountered while performing measurement of living organism

2. Bio-electric Signals and Electrodes.

2.1 Origin of bioelectric potentials –Resting potential, Action potential

2.2 Process of Polarization, Depolarization and Repolarization with typical action

potential waveform.

2.3 Typical Bio electric signals – ECG, EEG, EMG, ERG, EGG (Definitions).

2.4 Definition of Electrode and types of Electrodes – Micro electrode,

Surface electrode and needle electrode.

3 Recording Systems.

3.1 Block diagram of recording system.

3.2 Classification of Recorders.

3.3 Types of Recorders

Ink jet Recorder

Potentiometric Recorder

UV Recorder

4 Measuring and Monitoring Instruments for the Cardio vascular system.

4.1 Physiology of Cardio vascular system.

Pumping Action of the Heart.

Systolic and diastolic pressure.

Page 165: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

4.2 Electro cardiogram.

Block Diagram of ECG machine

Waveform.

4.3 Electrodes and Leads

Standard leads.

Einthoven Triangle.

4.4 Phono cardiograph.

Block Diagram and Working.

4.5 Blood pressure Measurement.

Direct – Explain the three types

Indirect Method – Sphygmomanometer method

4.6 Blood flow measurement.

Electromagnetic Blood flow meter.

Ultrasonic Blood flow meter.

4.7 Principle working, applications of the following devices

Pacemaker- Classification, Internal and External.

Defibrillator- Classification, Types - AC & DC

4.8 Plethysmograph.

Working

5 Miscellaneous Measuring Instruments.

5.1 Electro Encephalograph

Building blocks of EEG recorder

Types of EEG wave forms at different stages of sleep.

5.2 10-20 Electrode system.

5.3 Electromyography.

Block diagram and working. 5.4 Respiratory system.

Physiology.

Lung Volumes and Capacities.

5.5 Respiratory Therapy and Equipments.

Inhalators

Respirators/Ventilators.

Humidifiers.

Nebulizers and Aspirators.

Page 166: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

5.6 Working of Standard Spiro meter.

5.7 Principle & block diagram of Haemodialiser

5.8 Types – Pulsatile & Non Pulsatile

6 Instrumentation for Clinical Laboratory.

6.1 Blood – Constituents.

6.2 Blood cell counts using

Automatic optical method.

Electrical conductivity method (coulter blood cell counter).

7 Physiotherapy and Electrotherapy Equipments.

7.1 Biological stimulators.

Types of waveform used in stimulators.

7.2 Block diagram of Electro diagnostics/Therapeutic Stimulators.

7.3 Diathermy. – Definition and Types - Short Wave & Micro Wave

8 Imaging Techniques.

8.1 X-rays

Generation of X-rays , Applications

Properties and block diagram of X-ray Machine.

8.2 Computed tomography (CT)

Principle of working

Block Diagram of modern CT machine. Application

8.3 Magnetic Resonance Imaging

Principle , Block Diagram & Applications

8.4 Ultra sonic Imaging

Principle

9 Lasers in Biomedical Applications

9.1 Principle of Laser and types of Lasers.

Explanation of Ruby Lasers

Explanation of Carbon dioxide laser.

9.2 Lasers in ophthalmology.

Photo coagulation

Photo Disruption.

10. Electrical Safety and Operating Room Instrumentation

10.1 Shock Hazards from Electrical equipments.

Definition of Micro shock & Macro shock

10.2 Physiological effects of electric current

Page 167: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

10.3 Methods of Accident Prevention.

Grounding

Double Insulation

Using low voltage batteries.

10.4 Environment, Electrical Wiring and Cleanliness in operating room

10.5 Operating room Instrumentation.

Operating table

Surgical lights

Anesthesia Machine

Vital Signs monitor - Bed Side Monitor

O.T Care

11 Industrial Innovations

Students must be encouraged to collect topics pertaining to Bio Medical

Instrumentation. The topics may be specifically from Bio Wastes Disposal and

study of Bio materials. Necessary Documentation must be done.

Page 168: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engineering

Fifth Semester

Subject IC502: Bio-Medical Instrumentation

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Instructions

1) Section I is compulsory

2) Answer any 2 full questions from the Section II, III, IV

3) Maximum Marks: 100

SECTION I

1 a) Fill in the blanks with appropriate word(s) (1*5=5)

i) Action potentials of muscles can be measured and recorded using __ method

ii) The P-Q wave in ECG indicates __ depolarization

iii) ECG uses__ recorder

iv) ___ node act as delay line to provide timing between action of atria & ventricles

v) The frequency of a delta wave in EEG is __

b) Write short notes on Nebulizer and Humidifier (5)

SECTION II

2 a) Explain the working of Ink jet recorder with a neat diagram (8)

b) Mention the various bio potentials (5)

c) List the different types of recorders (2)

3 a) Explain the working of Surface electrodes with a neat diagram (7)

b) Explain the role of Bio-medical Engineer (5)

c) Draw the blocks in man Instrument system (3)

4 a) Explain the action potential waveform with a diagram (6)

b) Explain the working of muscle stimulator with a neat diagram (7)

c) List the types of Diathermy (2)

SECTION III

5 a) Explain ECG with a neat block diagram (8)

b) List the properties of X Rays (4)

c) Define Systolic & Diastolic Pressure (3)

6 a) With a neat diagram Coulter Blood Cell Counter (8)

b) Explain the operation of sphygmomanometer (5)

c) Name the instrument used for blood flow measurement (2)

7 a) With Diagrams explain the lead configurations of ECG (8)

b) Write a short note on MRI (5)

c) What is systolic and diastolic pressure (2)

Page 169: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

SECTION IV

8 a) Explain the building blocks of EMG recorder (8)

b) Write a short note on the physiological effects of electric current (5)

c) List the EEG waveforms at different stages of sleep (2)

9 a) Explain the equipments used in operating room Instrumentation (8)

b) With neat diagram explain Ruby laser (5)

c) Define Spirometer (2)

10 a) Explain the safety aspects with respect to electrical hazards (8)

b) Explain the working principle of laser (5)

c) Define Micro Shock (2)

* * * * * * * * * * * * * *

Page 170: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engineering

Fifth Semester

Sub: COMMUNICATION AND ANALYSIS SKILL DEVELOPMENT PROGRAMME

(CASP)

HOURS/WEEK: 06 TOTAL HOURS: 96

Competence to be developed in learners:

I. To present orally any topic of the student’s interest to the rest of the class without the

assistance of media or any other aid (only talk) for at least 10 minutes creating interest in

the listeners and sustaining the interest with a meaningful conclusion.

II. To prepare a study report on any product/service in comparison with another one that is

comparable from technical specification to customer satisfaction.

To present with the aid of slides (6 to 10) about the study conducted above to the rest of

the class in about 10 minutes with the use of print for information and slides for graphs,

pictures, images, video and animations etc.

Note to teachers:

A teacher may guide only 6 to a maximum of ten students per year. This is to ensure active participation of each learner.

All 96 hours need NOT be contact hours by the teacher. Students may be encouraged to do activities on their own with peer group to ensure higher level of participation.

There are ten different tasks to be completed in the course of 96 hours. On completion

of each task, record the result and the marks along with the initials of the learner for

future reference, inspection and evaluation.

A few activities are suggested under each task. Teachers can improvise on the list and add more activities as they progress from one batch to another.

Students should not be compared with each other; instead they must be compared to the standards given against each task.

The standard suggested is minimum requirement, learners may excel. The services of

those who excel may be utilised to guide other learners to reach the suggested minimum.

The tasks 8, 9 and 10 may be evaluated in the presence of the total group so that learners get the benefit of knowing the inferences made by others and even their presentation

style.

Details of tasks must be completed:

(One group consists of maximum 6 nos.)

Task 1 – Communication skills (one to one personal communication). 6 hrs. 5 marks. Method of achieving task: Practice in pairs through role play Suggested activities:

1. Telephonic conversation of a customer and supplier.

2. A Consumer Electronics showroom person and a customer.

3. Negotiation between Electronics marketing representative and a technical representative.

4. Conversation between quality inspectors and the production supervisor of shop floor

regarding production of quality components

Page 171: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Standards to be met:

Given a telephone number, a student must be able to call and gather information from the person, sustaining the conversation for about 3 min using proper

etiquettes and report on the enquiry made about the product or service. [e.g., call

a toll free number to ask details about a product or service]

Given a situation, a student must be able to talk to a person face to face in

simulation, gather information about a product, discuss about it and also

negotiate with him in the specified time (here, time can be specified by the

teacher as per the need).

Task 2 – Communication exercise (one to many in simulation) 6 hrs. 5 marks. Method of achieving task: Student should pick a topic and make presentation

Suggested Activities:

1. A very short talk highlighting the features of a branded mobile phone

2. A creative advertisement sequence for a consumer electronic product being eco friendly.

3. A debate on long term effects of radiation generated by communication equipments.

4. Panel discussion on energy auditing (power saving and optimising usage).

Standards to be met:

Given a brochure, one must be able to study about the product and understand it in 15 min and talk about it to his group highlighting its features and explain it in

about 3 min.

A student must be able to identify a topic of interest for debate, initiate the debate and carry it on, dividing the group into two based on different

perspectives(e.g., For and against the topic)

Task 3 – Listening Skills: 6 hrs. 5 marks. Method of achieving task: Listen to an advertisement and record the message

Suggested Activities:

1. View an advertisement of an electronic device and write down the message behind.

2. Listen to the audio in a promotional CD for about 15 minutes of any chosen product or

service. Note down points and discuss among friends.

3. Listen to a lecture on a topic of your choice from www.academicearth.org for 30

minutes and write down the summary in a paragraph of 20 lines.

4. Listen to a lecture on environmental effects of electronic waste disposal and write down

the summary in 200 words.

Standards to be met:

Given an audio clip or a visual of an advertisement, one must be able to listen carefully and understand it enabling him to write the message behind it in the

specified time (say in about 5 min.).

A student must be able to listen to a lecture or watch a CD for 15 min, noting down the key points and write a summary in 200 words in the next 15 min.

Note: Hints taken and the summary must be hand written by the student and

documented for evaluation.

Task 4 – Reading skills: 6 hrs. 5 marks. Method of achieving task: Read commercially available literature and make presentation

Suggested activities:

Page 172: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

1. Read an article from a magazine about the concept of Just in time and supply chain

management techniques in production industry in order to control the inventory and talk

to the rest of the group in about 5 minutes.

2. Read an advertisement of a new released Electronic product by a company and elaborate

its qualities after collecting information from a different source like the company web

site and a few customers.

3. Read an article on designing of Printed Circuits from the internet and note down the

steps in the process.

4. Read an article on Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) packages from the internet and

discuss the merits relevant to industry

5. Read a note on usage of automated material handling system and storage retrieval

system from any technical journal and narrate in the class and narrate it.

Standards to be met:

Given an article from a journal or an advertisement from a magazine, one must be able to comprehend it in 15 to 20 min. Later on read it out to an audience,

with proper intonation and elaborate it in the next 10 min.

Given an article from the internet, a student must be able to gather more

information from the net about it, understand it and read it out for an audience

and narrate it.

Task 5- Writing Skills: 12 hrs. 10 marks. Method of achieving task: Prepare a resume in writing & highlighting the skill sets

Suggested activities:

1. Write a resume and a covering letter for three different jobs

1) Wanted skilled technician for an IC fabrication industry.

2) Wanted technician who is proficient in Computer Networking for an MNC.

3) Wanted Service Technician for Consumer Electronics showroom.

2. Write a synopsis for given topics such as PCB Manufacturing.

3. Write a summary on latest technology in TV & mobiles.

4. Write an essay on any topic related to Electronics/IT for 150 words to 200 words.

Standards to be met:

Given a job advertisement, a student must be able to write a suitable

resume and a covering letter in 30 min [Advertisements can be tailor-

made by the teacher deliberately to train their students- e.g., two

different jobs like a marketing person and an assistant in a Research &

Development section and train students to prepare two resume for these

jobs highlighting different achievements of the student in co-curricular

activities to suit each job]

Given a topic, a student must be able to write a synopsis or summary or

an essay in about 150 words in the stipulated time.

Note: All these have to be hand written by the learner and documented for

evaluation.

Task 6- Knowledge of using Internet: 6 hrs. 5 marks. Method of achieving task: Use the internet and perform the task identified

Suggested activities:

Page 173: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

1. Creating an e-group with a free internet service provider among friends and act as a

moderator in turn among a group of learners.

2. Contacting other related groups from the net and communicating to them exchanging

views and ideas. Mobilising a signature campaign on the net for a common cause and

redressing it to an authority.

3. Collecting data from net

For example

1) Advanced fabrication technologies for IC manufacturing

2) Nanotechnology as applied to electronics

4. Forwarding resumes to different jobs.

Standards to be met:

Given an access to internet, one must be able to create an email ID, send mails,

forward simple mails and also mails with attachments including scanned

attachments and URL (web addresses for direct link). Also, they must be able to

collect data from different websites using internet search engines and forward

resumes to different job offering companies.

Note: Printouts of the mails, replies received and also the attachments with date

and time have to be documented.

Task 7- Oral communication: 6 hrs. 5 marks. Method of achieving task: Conduct group discussion on a specific topic and record the

discussions

Suggested activities:

1. Debate on a current topic on long term effects of radiation from electronic gadgets.

2. Group discussion on latest developments in mobile communications.

3. Discussion on qualities required for good entrepreneur.

4. Debate on role of women in managing the industry.

Standards to be met:

Given a topic of relevance, they must be able to form groups and discuss/debate

on it. Also one must take cue and participate actively in a group discussion .

Encourage students to note down the points of discussion and file the points in

the portfolio for evaluation.

Task 8- Data analysis: 18 hrs. 10 marks. Method of achieving task: Collecting market data and analysing for meaningful inferences

Suggested activities:

1. Collect data for any two products/equipments of two different producers used in

manufacturing industry which includes technical details, specifications, cost and

customer satisfaction.

2. Use appropriate tools and collect data from authentic sources. Depending on the source

decide the number of units for collecting the data. 3. Analyse the data with a view to compare the two products/ equipments.

4. Interpret the analysis for meaningful conclusions.

5. Record the whole process for any other person to verify.

Standards to be met:

Page 174: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Given two products/equipments/service, one must collect adequate information

from an authentic source for each, like the company website or the printed

brochure and record the specifications.

The maintenance of quality of the product/service needs to be studied from

personnel working at different levels in the company(3 -5 in number) for each

product/service. A set of questions needs to be prepared for collecting data. The

same questionnaire has to be used for collecting data from the personnel

mentioned above.

One must compare the two products for all the parameters based on the

specifications. Also, a market survey has to be done preparing a printed

questionnaire of around 5 questions and collecting responses from 20 customers.

Then, analyse the data, compare them and interpret the analysis for meaningful

conclusions.

Note: This being a comprehensive task may require few weeks to finish. The

data collected and the analysis carried out need to be documented.

Task 9-Presentation Skills: 12 hrs. 10 marks. Method of achieving task: Present the data collected and analysed in task 8 to a group of

students. Student should report on the activities carried out during Task 8 for about 10 minutes

supported by few slides (6 to 10) of pictures, graphs, images. The text material if any may

be printed and given to the audience. Discourage students from using text material in

slides.

Standards to be met:

One must present the analysis done in task 8 using slides with pictures, graphs,

images etc in 10 min. The first slide may contain text only as per need but other

slides should preferably have pictures and images. Usage of graphs for

comparison and analysis is preferred. Text materials have to be given as

handouts to the audience.

Task-10- Pick & Speak: 12 hrs. 5 marks. Method of achieving task: Pick and speak on any topic at spot

Suggested activities

Pick a topic from a lot and student should be allowed to speak for the duration of

2 to 3 minutes without the aid of any media.

Standards to be met:

One must be able to talk extempore for 2 min on any topic picked randomly

from the lot, given a time of two minutes for organising his/her thoughts. The

topics can be kept simple and general (current events of interest like cricket or

tsunami). It must be totally an oral activity without the aid of any other media.

Suggested topics for presentation, discussion, and written & other skill development

E-waste disposal

PCB designing using softwares

TMT ( Tread Mill Test)

PET Scanning)

Laser Applications

Automotive Electronics

Surface Mount Technology.

Page 175: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Quality Certification Standards

RTOS

Free and Open Source Softwares (FOSS)

3G & 4G mobiles

Blackberries

WCDMA

Wi-fi

VOIP

Blue-Ray Technology

Artificial Intelligence

Data Compression Techniques

Hi Speed Networks

Embedded Systems

ipod

ipad

FORMAT OF LOG SHEET *

Sl.No. Date Task Progress of

Task

Initials of staff in charge and

the student

Evaluation

(as suggested in each

task)

Signature of Guide Signature of HOD

All documented work as described in each task need to be filed in a portfolio

with task no.1 at the bottom and task 10 on top.

The log sheet may be filed on top.

Learners need to have only one portfolio which contains all original documents.

Duplicate copies need not be maintained. This is to ensure the authenticity of

data collected and the analysis conducted on the data.

SCHEME OF EVALUATION

(Total no. of students in one batch for end examination should not exceed 10)

1. Maintenance of portfolio & log book. 10

2. Evaluation of prepared report on all ten tasks 65

3. End examination:

A portfolio evaluation is recommended for the end examination evaluating the

record of all ten activities of each individual learner for consistency and in case of

any discrepancy the learner may be assessed on the criteria given against each task.

Marks awarded for evaluating the portfolio - 50

Total= 125.

Note to End examination evaluators:

Check the genuineness and authenticity of all recorded activities in the portfolio.

Page 176: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

The learner may be asked to do one activity of the choice of the examiner which involves listening to instructions, writing a small paragraph of 50 words, reading it and

talking for a few minutes.

The learner may be asked about his satisfaction of the marks awarded and in case of any

mismatch the examiner may assess his performance and alter the portfolio assessment

(here the benefit of doubt may be in favour of the learner i.e., an improvement may be

recorded but in case the examiner feels that the marks awarded is more the same may

be retained).

Do not compare the performance of one student with that of another.

Always compare the performance of a learner to the given standard.

Total time taken for the evaluation of a portfolio need not exceed 15 minutes.

Recommended text book for the prescribed syllabus: Ashan Academy (2011), Communication and Analysis skills, Orient

Blackswan, Hyderabad.

References:

1. Chakravarthi K. T. & Chakravarthi L. T. (2011), Soft Skills for Managers,

biztantra, New Delhi.

2. Alex K., (2009), Soft Skills: S. Chand & company Ltd, New Delhi.

3. Pink M. A. & S. E. Thomas. : Communication Skills, S. Chand & company

Ltd, New Delhi.

4. Siddons S. (2008), Presentation Skills, Universities Press, Hyderabad.

5. Adler.: Communication : Goals and Approaches, Cengage Learning.

6. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/English_Language_Skills_Assessment

7. http://www.how-to-write-a-resume.org/resume_writing_examples.html

8. http://www.mindtools.com/page8.html

9. http://lorien.ncl.ac.uk/ming/Dept/Tips/present/present.html

10. http://www.doaj.org/

11. http://www.openj-gate.com/

12. http://www.linuxalt.com/

13. http://www.linux.ie/newusers/alternatives.php

14. http://www.econsultant.com/i-want-open-source-software/index.html

15. http://www.opensourcemac.org/

16. http://www.opencascade.org/

In case during the implementation of CASP any teacher has a suggestion to improve the

learners competence concerning any one of the ten tasks or any other additional one please feel

free to mail to the following addresses: 1) [email protected] or 2) [email protected]

Page 177: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Enginering

Fifth Semester

Subject IC 501: Control System

No. of hours/week: 4 No. of hours / Sem: 64

Sl No. CONTENTS No. of hours Marks

1. Introduction to control system 04 11

2. Transfer functions 05 14

3. Mathematical modeling of physical systems 08 22

4. Block Diagram Reduction Technique 10 26

5. Signal Flow Graphs 10 26

6. Feedback systems 04 10

7. Stability of control systems 06 16

8. Controllers 08 20

9. Industrial Innovations 05 ---

Tests & Assignments 04 ---

TOTAL 64 145

Scheme of Studies

Chapter

No Particulars No of Hrs

Section I

Fill in the Blanks

6, 7, 8 Short Notes

Section II

1 Introduction to control system 04

2 Transfer functions 05

3 Mathematical Model of Physical Systems 08

Section III

4 Block Diagram Reduction Technique 10

5 Feedback Systems 04

6 Stability of Control Systems 06

Section IV

7 Signal Flow Graphs 10

8 Controllers 08

Page 178: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

General objectives

1. To appreciate the need of Control Engg

2. To know the use of Laplace Transforms & Transfer functions

3. To understand the Mathematical modeling of physical system

4. To obtain the Block Diagram Reduction of electrical networks

5. To understand the technique of SFG

6. To appreciate the need of Feedback system

7. To understand the concept of stability of a system

8. To know the different types of controllers

DETAILS OF CONTENTS NO OF HRS

1 INTRODUCTION TO CONTROL SYSTEM 04

Objective of control engineering

Types of control system & their comparison

2. TRANSFER FUNCTIONS 05

Introduction to Laplace transform & Laplace transform of different functions

Transfer functions & its properties

Determination of transfer function for simple electrical networks

3 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING OF PHYSICAL SYSTEMS 08

Mechanical & electrical systems

Analogy between Mechanical & electrical systems

Mathematical modeling of above systems

4. BLOCK DIAGRAM REDUCTION TECHNIQUES 10

Elements of block diagram

Block diagram algebra

Determination of overall transfer functions for a given system using block diagram

reduction technique.

5. SIGNAL FLOW GRAPHS 10

Introduction, Properties

SFG from differential equations, SFG terminology

Mason’s Gain formula

Determination of Transfer function using Mason’s gain formula

SFG from block diagram, SFG from circuit diagram.

Block diagram from SFG.

Merits & Demerits of SFG

Page 179: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

6. FEED BACK SYSTEMS 04

Definition and types.

Derivation of equation of negative feed back

Properties of negative feed back

Effect of negative feedback on noise, sensitivity.

7 STABILITY OF CONTROL SYSTEMS 06

Introduction

Definition and types of stability.

R-H Criteria

Limitations of R-H criteria.

Problems to be solved using R –H Criterion

Definition of Bode Plot and Types.

8 CONTROLLERS 08

Define the different types of Controllers.

Explain Electronic Controllers of PC, DC, IC, PIC, PDC.

9 INDUSTRIAL INNOVATIONS 05

REFERENCES

1) Control systems Engineering: Nagrath and Gopal

2) Feedback Control Systems: Schaums Outline Series

3) Solutions to Control System Problems: A K Jairath

4) Control Systems: A Anand Kumar

5) Modern Control Engg Katsuhiko Ogata

6) Instrumentation for Engg Measurements J W Dally, W F Riley

K G McConnell (Wiley)

7) Process Dynamics and Control Dale E Seborg, Thomas F Edgar

Duncan A Mellichamp (Wiley)

Page 180: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Enginering

Fifth Semester

Subject IC 501: Control System

No. of hours / week: 4 No. of hours / Sem: 64

SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. INTRODUCTION TO CONTROL SYSTEM

1.1 Definition of control system & objective of Control Engg.

1.2 Types of control system

Open loop - Block diagram, explanation

Closed loop systems – Block diagram, explanation

1.3 Examples -

Traffic light control system,

Temperature measurement system,

Liquid level control system etc. Diagram and explanation of each

2. TRANSFER FUNCTIONS

2.1 Definition & properties of Laplace transform ,

Laplace transform of impulse, step, ramp, exponential & sinusoidal functions

2.2 Definition of Transfer function & its properties

2.3 Determination of transfer function for simple electrical networks consisting of

Series & parallel elements

3 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING OF PHYSICAL SYSTEMS

3.1 Elements of Mechanical & electrical systems

3.2 Force – Voltage & Force – Current analogy between Mechanical & electrical

systems

3.3 Mathematical modeling of Mechanical and Electrical systems

(Writing differential equations)

4 BLOCK DIAGRAM REDUCTION TECHNIQUES

4.1 Elements of block diagram – Block, summing unit, take off point.

4.2 Block diagram algebra – cascading of blocks, moving take off point

ahead & behind block, moving summing unit ahead & behind block,

Eliminating feedback loop & parallel block

4.3 Determination of overall transfer function for a given SISO, SIMO, MISO &

MIMO systems using block diagram algebra

Page 181: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

5 SIGNAL FLOW GRAPHS

5.1 Introduction, Properties

5.2 SFG from differential equations, SFG terminology

5.3 Mason’s Gain formula

5.4 Determination of Transfer function using Mason’s gain formula for a given

problems.

5.5 Explain the construction of SFG from block diagram.

5.6 Explain the construction of SFG from circuit diagram.

5.7 Explain the construction of block diagram from SFG.

5.8 Merits & Demerits of SFG

6. FEED BACK SYSTEMS

6.1 Define feedback

6.2 Explain the types of feed back used in Electrical Systems

6.3 Characteristics of –ve feedback

6.4 Derive the equation for negative feedback.

6.5 Explain the effect of negative feedback on noise signal and sensitivity

7 STABILITY OF CONTROL SYSTEMS

7.1 Concept of stability

7.2 List the Classification of stability.

7.3 Describe the Necessary conditions for stability of a system

7.4 Outline the basic procedure of R- H Criteria

7.5 Find the solutions to the given problems using R-H criteria,

7.6 Limitations of R-H criteria

7.7 Definition of Bode Plot and Types

8 CONTROLLERS

8.1 Introduction

8.2 Definition of types of Controllers

Proportional Controller

Derivative Controller

Integral Controller

Proportional plus Integral Controller

Proportional plus Derivative Controller

Proportional Integral Derivative Controller

8.3 Electronic Controllers: PC, IC, DC, PIC & PDC.

9 INDUSTRIAL INNOVATIONS

Students must be encouraged to collect details of various Control Systems and also

discuss about the applications of different types of Controllers as listed in the above

topic. Necessary Documentation may be made in this regard.

Page 182: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Enginering

Fifth Semester

Subject IC 501: Control System

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Instructions

1) Section I is compulsory

2) Answer any 2 full questions from the Section II, III, IV

3) Maximum Marks: 100

SECTION I

1 a) Fill in the blanks with appropriate word(s) (1*5=5)

i) Electric washing machine is an example for _ _ _ _ _ _

ii) _ _ _ _ _ _ is analogous to Mass in Force Voltage Analogy

iii) _ _ _ _ _ _ node is having only incoming signals.

iv) R H Criteria is used to determine _ _ _ _ _ _ _ stability of the system

v) Negative feedback _ _ _ _ _ _ the bandwidth.

b) Write short notes on R H Criteria (5)

SECTION II

2 a) Explain the working of Open loop & Closed loop Control Systems with neat

block diagram and example. (8)

b) Define Transfer Function and write any 3 properties (5)

c) Compare Open Loop and Closed Loop Systems (2)

3 a) Write an analogous electrical system for a given mechanical system using

Force – Current & Force – Voltage analogy and also write the differential

Equations describing the circuit (8)

b) Explain F- V Analogy (5)

c) Define Laplace Transform (2)

4 a) Determine the transfer function for the circuit given below (6)

b) Find the transfer function of the mechanical system. (5)

c) Write the Differential Equations for the Mechanical System given below (4)

SECTION III

5 a) Problem on MIMO using Block Diagram Reduction (9)

b) Write any 4 rules used in Block Diagram Reduction (4)

c) Define block diagram (2)

6 a) Determine whether the system described by the characteristic equation

G (S) = 3s6+7s

5+20s

4+8s

3+4s

2+s+1 is stable or not using RH Criteria (7)

b) Derive the expression for Negative feedback (5)

c) Write the limitations of R – H Criteria (3)

Page 183: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

7 a) Problem on Block Diagram Reduction (7)

b) Explain the effect of negative feed back in reducing the sensitivity of the

System to parameter variations (6)

c) Define Bode Plot and types (2)

SECTION IV

8 a) Determine the overall transfer function for the signal flow graph

given below (6)

b) Determine the overall transfer function for the circuit diagram using

Masons Gain formula (6)

c) What are the properties of Signal flow graph ? (3)

9 a) Determine the overall transfer function for the Block Diagram using

Masons Gain formula (7)

b) Define Controller and explain PI Controller (6)

c) What are the merits of Signal Flow Graph (2)

10 a) Explain Electronic PDC Controller (8)

b) Explain PID Controller (5)

c) List the types of Controllers (2)

* * * * * * * * * * * * * *

Page 184: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engineering

Fifth Semester

Subject IC 503: Industrial Electyronics & PLC

No. of hours/week: 4 No. of hours / Sem: 64

Sl No. CONTENTS No. of hours Marks

1. Power devices and applications 18 45

2. Controlled rectifiers 05 14

3. Choppers 05 14

4. Inverters 04 11

5. Cyclo-converters 04 11

6. Solid state control for DC motors 05 15

7. Solid state control for AC motors 02 05

8. PLC 12 30

9. Industrial Innovations 05 ---

Tests & Assignments 04 ---

TOTAL 64 145

Scheme of Studies

Chapter

No Particulars No of Hrs

Section I

Fill in the Blanks

Short Notes

Section II

1 Power devices and applications 18

Section III

2 Controlled rectifiers 05

3 Choppers 05

4 Inverters 04

5 Cyclo-converters 04

Section IV

6 Solid state control for DC motors 05

7 Solid state control for AC motors 02

8 PLC 12

Page 185: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

General objectives:

1. Know the construction, principle of operation, characteristics and applications of

Power Semiconductor Devices.

2. Know the operation of controlled rectifier.

3. Understand the operation of Chopper

4 Understand the operation of Inverter

5 Understand the operation of Cyclo Converter

6 Understand the solid state control of DC Motor

7 Understand the Solid state control of AC Motor

8 Grasp the basics of PLC

CONTENTS No of Hrs

1. POWER DEVICES AND APPLICATONS 18

Basic symbol, construction, Principle, characteristics, application of :-

Power diode, Power transistor, MOSFET, SCR, DIAC, TRIAC, IGBT,

Comparison between SCR & TRIAC, BJT & FET, MOSFET & IGBT

Turn-on methods of SCR- Gate triggering

Triggering circuits:- Resistance firing circuit, RC firing circuit, UJT firing circuit

Thyristor Turn-off methods:- Line commutation, Forced commutation

Forced commutation types:- Load commutation, Self commutation, Voltage

commutation, complementary commutation, external pulse commutation,

Line commutation

SCR protection against over-current, over-voltages, large di/dt, large dv/dt

Applications:- Light dimmer using diac and triac, burglar alarm using SCR

Emergency light using SCR

2. CONTROLLED RECTIFIERS 05

Classification: - Single phase half wave controlled rectifier, Single phase

half controlled bridge rectifier, Single phase fully controlled bridge rectifier

Three phase fully controlled bridge rectifier

Advantages of controlled rectifiers

Applications of controlled rectifiers

Page 186: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

3. CHOPPERS 05

Basic Principle, control schemes-Constant frequency, variable frequency system,

Type of choppers- step-down chopper, step-up chopper

Chopper circuit classification-Single, Two, Four quadrant choppers

4 INVERTERS 04

Basic Principle, classification- Series inverter, parallel inverter,

Single phase full-bridge voltage source inverter

5 CYCLO-CONVERTERS 04

Basic principle, advantages, disadvantages, applications

Single phase to single phase cyclo-converter- Bridge configuration

Three phase to single phase cyclo-converter:- Bridge cyclo-converter

Three Phase to Three phase cyclo-converter

6 SOLID STATE CONTROL OF DC MOTOR 05

Speed control of DC motor using Thyristor

Speed control of DC motor using Armature voltage control method

Speed control of DC motor using Field control method

DC chopper Field control

Overload protection of DC motors

7. SOLID STATE CONTROL OF AC MOTOR 02

Speed control of a single phase Induction motor using DIAC and TRIAC

Speed control of a Three phase Induction motor

Page 187: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

8 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 12

Logic control, Relay Logic control, PLC

Difference between PLC and Relay logic panel

Block diagram of PLC, hardware, Memory organization

Programming languages types:- ladder diagram

Logical instructions:- combinational logic, Boolean logic, compare

Timer types:- On-delay, off-delay, retentive on-delay

Counters:- UP counter, Down counter, Up/Down counters

Ladder Logic design, latching circuit

List the Applications.

9 INDUSTRIAL INNOVATIONS 05

TEXT BOOK:

1) Power Electronics and PLC K Shashidhara, Sapna Publications

REFERENCES

1) Power Electronics Mohammed Rasheed, PHI

2) Electronics in Industry Chute & Chute

3) Thyristor Engineering MS Berde

4) Industrial electronics and control SK Bhatacharya, S Chatterjee

5) Power Electronics GK Dubey , Vedam subramaniam

6) PLC Frank Petruzella

7) PLC principles and applications John webb & Ronald Reis

8) PLC principles and applications NIIT, PHI

9) Power Electronics Essentials & Applications L Umanand (Wiley Publications)

10) Power Electronics Converters, Application & Design,Mohan, Undeland, Riobbins

(Wiley Publications)

Page 188: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engineering

Fifth Semester

Subject IC 503: Industrial Electronics & PLC

No. of hours / week:04 No. of hours / Sem: 64

SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. POWER DEVICES AND APPLICATONS

1.1 Basic symbol, construction, Principle, characteristics, application of:-

Power diode,

Power transistor,

MOSFET,

SCR,

DIAC,

TRIAC,

IGBT, 1.2 Comparison between SCR & TRIAC, BJT & FET, MOSFET & IGBT

1.3 Turn-on methods of SCR- Gate triggering

1.4 Triggering circuits:- Resistance firing circuit, RC firing circuit,

UJT firing circuit

1.5 Thyristor Turn-off methods: - Line commutation, Forced commutation

1.5.1 Forced commutation types: - Load commutation, Self commutation,

Voltage commutation, complementary commutation, external pulse

commutation,

1.5.2 Line commutation

1.6 SCR protection against over-current, over-voltages, large di/dt, large dv/dt

1.7 Applications:- Light dimmer using diac and triac, burglar alarm using SCR

Emergency light using SCR

2. CONTROLLED RECTIFIERS

2.1 Classification:

Single phase half wave controlled rectifier,

Single phase half controlled bridge rectifier,

Single phase fully controlled bridge rectifier

Three phase fully controlled bridge rectifier

2.2 Advantages of controlled rectifiers, Applications of controlled rectifiers

3. CHOPPERS

3.1 Basic Principle, control schemes-Constant frequency, variable frequency

system,

3.2 Type of choppers- step-down chopper, step-up chopper

3.3 Chopper circuit classification-Single, Two, Four quadrant choppers

Page 189: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

4. INVERTERS

4.1 Basic Principle,

4.2 Classification- Series inverter, parallel inverter,

4.3 Single phase full-bridge voltage source inverter

5. CYCLO-CONVERTERS

5.1 Basic principle, advantages, disadvantages, applications

5.2 Single phase to single phase cyclo-converter- Bridge configuration

5.3 Three phase to single phase cyclo-converter:- Bridge cyclo-converter

5.4 Three Phase to Three phase cyclo-converter

6. SOLID STATE CONTROL OF DC MOTOR

6.1 Speed control of DC motor using

Thyristor

Armature voltage control method

Field control method 6.2 DC chopper Field control

6.3 Overload protection of DC motors

7. SOLID STATE CONTROL OF AC MOTOR

7.1 Speed control of a single phase Induction motor using

DIAC and

TRIAC 7.2 Speed control of a three phase Induction motor

8. PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS

8.1 Logic control, Relay Logic control, PLC

8.2 Difference between PLC and Relay logic panel

8.3 Block diagram of PLC, hardware, Memory organization

8.4 Programming languages types:- ladder diagram

8.5 Logical instructions:- combinational logic, Boolean logic, compare

8.6 Timer types:- On-delay, off-delay, retentive on-delay

8.7 Counters:- UP counter, Down counter, Up/Down counters

8.8 Ladder Logic design, latching circuit

8.9 List the Applications:-

Traffic light control,

Water level control,

Conveyor control,

Lift control

9 INDUSTRIAL INNOVATIONS

Students must be encouraged to collect data of various Power Devices and their

applications in industry. Also they must study about PLC, applications of PLC and

necessary documentation may be made in this regard.

Page 190: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engineering

Fifth Semester

Subject IC 503: Industrial Electronics & PLC

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Instructions

1) Section I is compulsory

2) Answer any 2 full questions from the Section II, III, IV

3) Maximum Marks: 100

SECTION I

1 a) Fill in the blanks with appropriate word(s) (1*5=5)

i) A SCR turns off when the anode current falls below the __

ii) The process of turning off an SCR is called __

iii) Step-up chopper operates in __ quadrant

iv) PLC stands for ___

v) A snubber circuit consists of __

b) Write short notes on IGBT (5)

SECTION II

2 a) Explain two transistor analogy of an SCR (8)

b) Explain the working of snubber circuit (5)

c) List the turn-on methods of SCR (2)

3 a) Explain Light dimmer circuit using Diac and Triac (8)

b) Explain the VI characteristic of Triac (5)

c) List the applications of Diac (2)

4 a) Explain the working of UJT firing circuit with a neat diagram (8)

b) Compare MOSFET and IGBT (5)

c) What is commutation (2)

SECTION III

5 a) What is a chopper. Explain the control strategies employed in choppers (8)

b) Explain the operation of step-up DC chopper (5)

c) List the applications of cyclo-converters (2)

6 a) Explain the operation of basic parallel Inverter (8)

b) Explain the operation of single phase bridge voltage source inverter (5)

c) Classify the chopper circuits (2)

7 a) Explain the working of single phase fully controlled bridge rectifier (8)

b) List two advantages and disadvantages of cyclo-converters (5)

c) Classify the inverters based on commutation (2)

Page 191: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

SECTION IV

8 a) Explain speed control of DC shunt motor using field control and armature

voltage method. (8)

b) Explain the speed control of DC motor using DC chopper (5)

c) List any two advantages of electronic control of drives (2)

9 a) Explain the ladder logic for traffic light control application (8)

b) Explain the ladder logic for latching circuit in a PLC (5)

c) What is induction motor (2)

10 a) Compare Relay logic panel and PLC control panel (8)

b) Explain the memory organization in a PLC (5)

c) List any two programming languages used in PLC (2)

* * * * * * * * * * * * * *

Page 192: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Govt of Karnataka,

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engg

Fifth Semester

Sub IC505: Instrumentation CAD Lab

Contact Hrs / Sem: 96 Contact Hrs / Week: 06

General Objectives

After the completion of the lab student must be able to

1) Know the how to use CAD, P&ID software

2) Understand ISA symbols used in process flow

3) Understand how to design the front panel for the lab equipments

4) Know how to Draw the Process flow Diagrams using ISA Symbols

Part A (Study Exercise) 12

1) Introduction to AUTO CAD - Study of toolbar / menus

2) Introduction to software interface

3) Standard toolbar menu

4) Understanding the coordinate systems 2D and 3D visualization

5) Setting the paper sizes and inserting the title blocks

6) Study of Drawing tools / Commands - line, arc, circle, rectangle, polygons,

ellipse, text duplicating commands, copy, mirror, offset, arrays.

7) Modifying commands – Move, extend, break, trim, lengthen, chamfer, fillet, etc

8) Changing the properties of Graphic Entities

9) Creation of Blocks and groups using CAD

Part B (Conduction Experiments)

1) Sectional view of cube, prism, valves, Actuators, Nozzles 15

2) Front Panel of CRO, Power Supply, Signal Generator, Multimeter 15

3) Front Panel of Medical Equipments like ECG, Bedside Monitors,

Muscle Stimulator 15

4) To Draw Structure of ISA Flow symbols 12

1. Containers & vessels

2. Electrical

3. General instrument symbols- balloons

4. Primary elements symbols- voltage, flow rate current, power, level

and Temperature

5. Valves & actuators

5) Draw the Process flow Diagrams using ISA Symbols 15

1. Schematic for open Tank level Measurement

2. Schematic for closed Tank level Measurement

3. Control of water heating system

4. P&ID for a chemical process

Page 193: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

5. Temperature controlled Chemical reactor

Part C ( Not for Exam )

Familiarize with AutoCAD P & ID 2010 software 06

Test and Assignments 06

AUTO CAD - TUTORIAL AUTODESK INC

Engineering Drawing: K.R. Gopal Krishna

Computer Aided Engineering Drawing - S. Trymbaka Murthy]

http://canteach.candu.org/library/20041601.pdf

http://www.isa.org/Content/Microsites165/SP18,_Instrument_Signals_and_Alarms/Home

163/ISA_Standards_for_Committee_Use/S_55.pdf

SCHEME OF VALUATION

S No Particulars Marks

1 Record 05

2 Writing Exercise from Part A 15

3 Writing procedure from Part B 20

4 Autocad drawing 40

5 Viva Voce 20

Total 100

Page 194: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Govt of Karnataka,

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engg

Fifth Semester

Sub IC 504: P L C Lab

Contact Hrs / Sem: 96 Contact Hrs / Week: 06

General Objectives

After the completion of the lab student must be able to

1) Know the operation of PLC simulator

2) Know how to verify the function of Basic Gates using PLC

3) Understand the Interfacing concept using PLC

4) Understand how to write the Ladder Diagram for the given problems

5) Know the Programming of Timers and Counters

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

Part A (Study Exercise) (Contact Hrs – 21)

1. Study the Architecture of PLC & its operation , Types of PLC’s & Makes

2. Identify various hardware components related to PLC & its function

3. Identify various types of Input devices like Push Button switch , limit switch ,

sensors etc

4. Identify various types of Output devices like motor , valves, contactor , Alarm

etc

5. Understand LADDER Programming

Part B (Conduction Experiments) No of Hrs

01. Test the basic gates using PLC 03

02. Test the universal gates using PLC. 03

03. Test the EX-OR gate and EX-NOR gates using PLC 03

04. Programs on ON-Delay Timer and OFF-Delay Timers 06

05. Programs on Retentive and Non-Retentive Timers. 06

06. Programs on Up counter and Down counters 09

07. Programs to perform mathematical operations like ADD SUB MUL

COMPARE 12

08 Write and test LADDER Diagram for the following Exercise (3 Hrs each)

a) Process Fan

A process fan is to run only when all the following conditions are met

Page 195: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Input 1 is OFF]

Input 2 is ON or Input 3 is ON or both 2 & 3 are ON

Inputs 5 & 6 are both ON

One or more of Inputs of 7,8 or 9 is ON

b) Two Alternatively Flashing Signal Lights

Alternate ON & OFF of two Lights on every 5 Secs. The ON time

for each light can be varied by resetting the times in the functional

block. The time ON for each of the 2 lights may be the same or the

two times could be set to different intervals.

c) Level ON / OFF Control

When there is no Water in the Tank the motor should ON.

When Low Level the motor should ON

When High Level the motor should OFF

d) Three Lights A B C turn ON at the same time when the switch is

actuated. B shuts OFF after 15 secs and C shuts OFF after 30 secs.

e) Alarm System

There are 4 Hazards.

If one hazard is present, nothing happens

If two hazards are present, Red Pilot Light goes ON

If three hazards are present an alarm sirens sounds

If four hazards are present the fire department is notified.

Part C (Conduct any Two)

1. Program to interface Water level controller. 06

2. Program to interface Traffic light controller. 06

3. Program to interface Conveyor controller. 06

4. Program to interface Lift controller. 06

Test & Assignments 06

TOTAL 96

Page 196: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

SCHEME OF VALUATION

S NO Particulars Marks

1 Record 05

2 Writing Study Exercise (Part A) 10

3 Writing 2 Programs

(one from Part B and one from Part C) 30

4 Execution of the Program (Part B) 25

5 Result 10

6 Viva Voce 20

Total 100

Page 197: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

TASKS RESOURCE NEEDED

I

FORT

NIGH

T

II

FORT

NIGH

T

III

FORT

NIGH

T

IV

FORT

NIGH

T

V

FORT

NIGH

T

VI

FORT

NIGH

T

VII

FORT

NIGH

T

VIII

FORT

NIGH

T

VACA

TION

IX

FORT

NIGH

T

X

FORT

NIGH

T

XI

FORT

NIGH

T

XII

FORT

NIGH

T

XIII

FORT

NIGH

T

XIV

FORT

NIGH

T

XV

FORT

NIGH

T

XVI

FORT

NIGH

T

Literature survey for project

Internet / library /

industry / Research

Centres

Finalisation of the Area in which

the project has to be done (

Example : Design / Manufacturing

/ Thermal Engineering )Internet / library /

industry

Finding out Facility to do the

project

Laboratory /

Industry/ Project

Sites

Collecting Data / Doing

experiments / writing of code

Laboratory /

Industry/ Project

Sites

Analysis of Data Using relevent

software

Results and Fine tuning the

experiment using the Data

Analysis

Laboratory /

Industry/ Project

Sites

Report writing

Submission of Project Report and

Viva voce

PROJECT WORK - SCHEDULING

Page 198: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engineering

Fifth & Sixth semester

Subject: Project work

Contact Hours / week: 3 Contact hours / Sem: 48 hours

General Objectives

Details of contents

The Project gives an opportunity to apply all his / her knowledge and skills acquired

throughout his / her study. The finished project will show the students skill in the

fabrication of the circuit. Hence the student should employ his / her ingenuity to reflect

his / her own desire and requirement. The project will make the student confident of his /

her ability to apply his / her skills in constructing the circuit or equipment of which

he /she can be proud of

1. A practical project needs to be taken. The steps involved in the project work are

1. Identification of the project

2. Problem definition

3. Gathering information / data needed for the project

4. Selection of best solutions

5. Selection and collection of suitable material

6. Planning and fabrication

7. Testing

8. Preparing a detailed project report

2. The project report should have the following features

1. Introduction

2. Name and feature of the project

3. Block diagram of the project

4. Circuit diagram and its brief description

5. Flow chart

6. Components layout

7. Printed circuit pattern or layout diagram of the circuit

8. Front panel and cabinet drawing

9. Components list

10. Cost estimation of the project

11. Power supply

12. Testing points and waveforms if any

13. Operation and maintenance procedure

14. Suggestions for improvement if any

15. Electrical safety information

16. Conclusion

Page 199: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

3. The internal and final evaluation marks have to be awarded on the basis of the

above features along with viva-voce at the end

4. Students may be advised to do the projects in the following related areas

1. Project based on Process control Instrumentation

2. Project based on Microcontrollers

3. Project based on Programmable Logic controllers

4. Project based on Bio-medical field

5. Project based on Environmental Instrumentation

6. Project based on Computer controlled process Instrumentation

7. Project based on Industrial Electronics equipments

8 Project based on Industrial Automation

Note: - The respective institutes can arrange number of industrial visits to facilitate and

gain knowledge for the students

The students are to be closely monitored to avoid purchasing the project directly.

__________________________________________________

GUIDELINES FOR THE PREPARATION OF PROJECT REPORTS

1. Project reports should be typed neatly in Times New Roman letters with font size 14 for

titles and 12 for text on both sides of the paper with 1.5 line spacing on a A4 size paper

(210 x 297 mm). The margins should be:

Left - 1.5", Right - 1", Top and Bottom - 0.75".

2. The total number of reports (Soft bound) to be prepared are

One copy to the department /library

One copy to the concerned guide(s)

One copy to the candidate.

3. Before taking the final printout, the approval of the concerned guide(s) is mandatory and

suggested corrections, if any, must be incorporated.

4. Every copy of the report must contain

Inner title page (White)

Outer title page with a plastic cover

Candidate declaration and Certificate in the format enclosed both from the

institution and the organization where the project is carried out.

An abstract (synopsis) not exceeding 100 words, indicating salient features of the

work.

Page 200: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

5. The organization of the report should be as follows

1. Inner title page

2. Abstract or Synopsis

3. Acknowledgments

4. Table of Contents

5. List of table & figures (optional)

Usually numbered in

roman

CANDIDATE’S DECLARATION

I, ------------------------------------------ the student of Diploma in ------------------------------

Department bearing Reg No---------------------------------------of -------------------------------

--------------- hereby declare that I own full responsibility for the information, results and

conclusions provided in this project work titled “-------------------------------------------------

---------------------------------- “submitted to Board of Technical Examinations,

Government of Karnataka for the award of Diploma in -----------------------------------.

To the best of my knowledge, this project work has not been submitted in part or full

elsewhere in any other institution/organization for the award of any

certificate/diploma/degree. I have completely taken care in acknowledging the

contribution of others in this academic work. I further declare that in case of any violation

of intellectual property rights and particulars declared, found at any stage, I, as the

candidate will be solely responsible for the same.

Date:

Place:

Signature of candidate

Name: --------------------

Reg No-------------------

Page 201: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

DEPARTMENT OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION

NAME OF THE INSTITUTION

Address with pin code

Department of ……………………………………………………..

CERTIFICATE

Certified that this project report entitled -----------------------------------------------------------

---------

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------”which is being

submitted by Mr./Ms. ………………………….……………….., Reg. No…..……………, a

bonafide student of …………………………………….in partial fulfillment for the award of

Diploma in -----------------Engineering during the year ……………………... is record of

students own work carried out under my/our guidance. It is certified that all

corrections/suggestions indicated for internal Assessment have been incorporated in the Report

and one copy of it being deposited in the polytechnic library.

The project report has been approved as it satisfies the academic requirements in respect of

Project work prescribed for the said diploma.

It is further understood that by this certificate the undersigned do not endorse or approve

any statement made, opinion expressed or conclusion drawn there in but approve the

project only for the purpose for which it is submitted.

Guide(s)

Name and signature

Examiners

1

2

Head of Department

Dept. of --------------------

PROJECT EVALUATION:

Page 202: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

1. Relevance of the subject in the present context 10 mark

2. Literature Review 10 mark

3. Fabrication of the model/Data collection/repair and

Overhauling work 40 mark

4. Results & Discussion 10 mark

5. Industrial visit report 10 mark

6. Presentation 20 mark

TOTAL 100 mark

I A MARKS EVALUATION:

1. First review (During the end of V Th

semester) 25 mark

2. Second review (During the end of VI Th

semester) 25 mark

TOTAL 50 mark

I A Marks:

Scheme of Evaluation

1 Log record 05

2 Synopsis 10

3 Presentation 10

Total 25

NOTE: 1. I A marks to be awarded at the end of EACH SEMESTER.

2.The candidate declaration and certificate sample copy are enclosed here for

incorporation in final project report

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

------------

ROADMAP FOR PROJECT GUIDES

1. The project work is proposed to be carried out during the V and VI semesters so

that learners prepare during the V semester, do some field work based on the

preparation during the mid semester vacation and report the analysis and

inferences during the VI semester.

Page 203: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

2. The learners would reach a level of maturity by the time they reach V semester

and so a meaningful project lasting for a year can be executed by them.

3. To execute the project with involvement needs constant guidance and monitoring

of the progress of the learners by the guide.

4. This does not mean teacher has to advice learners.

5. Be confident about the ability of the learner and “intellectually provoke” them

with challenging questions. These questions should prompt the learners to search

information and update themselves (to be carried out during the first two weeks).

6. Do not feed information to learners. Instead crate a „cognitive dissonance‟ (a

challenging question or situation that the learner is not able to find an immediate

answer but feels the need to search for information to find a solution).

7. Defer judgement on learners and give them identified sources if required like a

journal article, book or a web site.

8. Even if the learners report their inability to solve do NOT give or prescribe a

solution.

9. Be patient and give time for the learner to construct his knowledge.

10. Give corrective feedback to the learner by challenging his solutions so that his

logic is questioned and it develops further.

11. This leads to the first activity viz., literature survey and conceiving a project.

12. During this phase meet the project team in a group and create a healthy

competition among the learners to search different sources and synthesise their

findings in the group.

13. Aim for bringing out a workable innovative project conceived within the first

eight weeks as given in the schedule attached.

14. During these two phases and the third phase the teacher should assess the

strengths and weakness of the members of the group and allocate differential

work to team members on the remaining tasks to be carried out during the next

thirty weeks.

15. This is to ensure active participation of all the members of the team.

16. By the end of the twelfth week finalise the project and a schedule of further

activities for each member indicating the time frame in which his activities are to

be executed may be made ready. A soft copy of this schedule may be collected

from each learner by the guide to follow up.

17. This schedule prepared by each learner need to be documented for checking

further progress of the project.

18. The next few phases of the project may require active guidance of the guide

especially regarding the sources of collecting data, if a sample data is to be

collected the number of units has to be decided, collating the data/fabricating,

tryout/analysis and finally coming out with meaningful conclusions or models or

application.

Page 204: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

19. Data like models, designs, technical specifications, source code, protocols and

original records need be collected from one authentic source as there will not be

any variation. The teacher may guide the learners to authentic source.

20. Data having limited variability like product/service quality, processes and

standards, procedures need to be collected from a sample as there is a variation.

The number of units from whom (source) the data is to be collected is called

sample. The sample needs to be representative of the expected variation. The

decision on the size of the sample and the number of units need guidance from the

teacher. For example, data regarding the quality of a product/service need be

collected from 3 to 5 personnel at different levels of a service provider or dealers

of a product. The numbers given are suggestive but a guide based on his

experience has to make valid suggestions.

21. Data having a wide range of variation like customer satisfaction where the

customers are members of the public need a larger number of units to

accommodate the diversity. A tool like questionnaire with predetermined

questions need to be prepared, tried out on a small sample and finalise the

questions. Data may be collected from at least 30 units. This number is

suggested to apply statistical analysis for meaningful conclusions. Guides may

decide on the sample size depending on the accessibility of data.

22. The intention of the above three points viz., 19, 20 and 21 is to ensure objectivity

in data collection i.e., to reduce the subjectivity of the human mind.

23. All the above activities need to be completed before three to four weeks before

the end of V semester (refer the spread sheet related to scheduling).

24. The learners may be instructed to collect data objectively with identified sample

during the next 4 to six weeks which includes the mid semester holidays. This

would enable the learners to visit the field and collect data without the constraint

of reporting to institution and attending classes on a regular basis.

25. The collected data need to be organised and entered to spread sheets or similar

formats for analysis. Qualitative data may be converted to quantitative using a

rating scale or similar data organisation procedures.

26. The result of most analysis on spreadsheet could be obtained in tables or graphs as

per the requirement.

27. Activities mentioned in points 24, 25 and 26 may be carried out by learners

during 4 to 8 weeks after commencement of VI semester.

28. Interpretation of the analysed tables and graphs to arrive at meaningful inference.

The guide at this stage may defer his ideas on interpretation allowing the learners

to do this. In case the learners err in the process they may be given corrective

feedback.

29. A report of the whole process of doing the project may be written, word processed

and submitted in triplicate.

Page 205: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

30. Guides may contact industries and try to solve their problems so that the learners

get a field experience and they get ready for the industry.

31. Innovations and innovative practices may be encouraged among the learners to be

pursued as a project. Developing prototypes, (in simulation or real) trying out

feasibility of new ideas, changing existing systems by adding modules,

combining, assembling new modules and developing new systems may be given

higher priority over routine bookish projects.

32. The schedule of events proposed is for an investigative project as a model.

Guides may alter the prescribed schedule to suit the kind of innovative projects

sited in point No.31 above.

33. Industry personnel may be involved in conceiving, executing and evaluating

projects. This gives credibility to the institute and acceptance of learners for

absorption into the company.

GUIDELINES TO LEARNERS TO CARRY OUT A TWO

SEMESTER PROJECT

1. Carry out the project work through the V and VI semesters. Preparation must be

done during the V semester and based on this, field work should be done during

the mid semester vacation and reporting of analysis and inferences should be done

in the VI semester.

2. You have the ability and the level of maturity needed to conceive an innovative

and meaningful project accomplishing which gives you recognition by the

industry and empowers you with the power of knowledge.

3. Understand your strength and weakness and make an effort to find the strength

and weakness of other peers in the team.

4. Complement each other‟s strength rather than compete with peers within the

team. This will enable you to complete a comprehensive and innovative project

relevant to the industrial needs rather than doing a routine copy of what others

have done.

5. Seek guidance from the teacher and update him/her about the progress.

6. Be confident about your ability and that of other members of your group. Take

extra efforts to collect information, share with your peers and synthesise your

knowledge.

7. Question everything including the ideas of your teacher. Accept the ideas and

instructions which are internally consistent (logical).

8. Involve actively in group activities and contribute towards the tasks.

9. Do not depend too much on the teacher as a source of information, search on your

own and build your knowledge structure. Search for authentic sources like

journal articles, books and authentic sites rather than blogs and tweets.

Page 206: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

10. Though brief, record your thoughts and activities including searches immediately.

11. Prepare a schedule for your work on a spread sheet and encourage your peers to

do the same.

12. Show your schedule and that of others to the teacher and get his feedback.

13. Keep reviewing the schedule every fortnight and take corrective steps if needed.

For doing this keep the general guideline schedule given in the curriculum as a

backdrop.

14. Tools used for data collection like instruments, testing machines, questions to be

asked and software may be tried out and standardised by the twelfth week of the

project. Seek the teacher‟s help who is experienced in doing this.

15. Collect data dispassionately or objectively (without applying your personal

prejudice). Complete this task before the VI semester begins.

16. While entering data into the spread sheet ask your peer member to verify. This

will ensure accuracy of data entry.

17. Use appropriate mathematics/statistics for calculations. Seek help from external

sources (other than your teacher) if required.

18. The results of your analysis need to be graphically represented and documented.

You may also add photographs and video clips to increase the validity.

19. This task needs to be completed within 8 weeks after commencement of VI

semester.

20. Interpret the data (after analysis) and arrive at meaningful inferences on your

own in discussion with your peers. Get it ratified by your teacher. Suggestions

from the teacher may be discussed among your peers and incorporated if they are

internally consistent.

21. The project report may be word processed (videos, photographs attached in soft

copy) and submitted in triplicate two weeks before the end of VI semester.

22. Involve passionately in the team work, make constructive contributions and come

out with an industry friendly project which will equip you in your professional

development.

Page 207: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engineering

Sixth Semester

Subject: IC 603 Advanced Process Instrumentation

No. of hours/week: 4 No. of hours / Sem: 64

Sl No. CONTENTS No. of hours Marks

1. Force and Torque measurement 10 26

2. Measurement of speed, Vibration and

acceleration 09 23

3. Measurement of density, Humidity, moisture 10 26

4. Nuclear measurement 04 12

5. Power Plant Instrumentation 08 21

6. Pneumatic Instrumentation 08 21

7. Optical Instrumentation 06 16

8. Industrial Innovations 05 ---

Tests & Assignments 04 ---

TOTAL 64 145

Scheme of Studies

Chapter

No Particulars No of Hrs

Section I

Fill in the Blanks and short notes

Section II

1 Force and Torque measurement 10

2 Measurement of speed, vibration and

acceleration 09

Section III

3 Measurement of density, Humidity, moisture 10

5 Power Plant Instrumentation 08

Section IV

4 Nuclear Measurement 04

8 Optical Instrumentation 06

7 Pneumatic Instrumentation 08

Page 208: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

General Objectives:

1 To appreciate the need of various force and torque measuring transducers

2 To study about Speed, Vibration and Acceleration Transducers.

3 To study about Humidity, Density and Moisture Measuring Instruments

4 To study about Nuclear Instrumentation Measurements

5 To understand the Concept of Power Plant Instrumentation

6 To understand the Concept of Pneumatic Instrumentation

7 To understand the Concept of Optical Instrumentation

CONTENTS No of Hrs

1. FORCE AND TORQUE MEASUREMENTS 10

Introduction

Basic methods of Force measurements

Force measuring sensors- Load cell (Strain gauge, proving ring,

Piezoelectric, hydraulic, Pneumatic)

Working of Digital force transducers

Torque measurement-strain gauge torque meter, digital torque meter, and

magneto-strictive transducer

2. MEASUREMENT OF SPEED, VIBRATION & ACCELERATION 09

Introduction

Classification of Tachometers

Tachometer- AC tachometer, DC tachometer, Stroboscopic Tachometer

Vibration sensing devices- Seismic Displacement Pickups,

Seismic velocity pickup,

Accelerometer- Seismic acceleration pickup , Piezo electric, LVDT

3. MEASUREMENT OF DENSITY, HUMIDITY AND MOISTURE 10

Introduction

Classification of Density measuring instruments

Density measurement using - weight, buoyancy, Hydrostatic Head, Radiation

Classification of Moisture & Humidity Measurement Techniques

Measurement of Moisture & humidity in Gases – Dew point instruments,

electrical sensor instruments

Measurement of Moisture & humidity over Liquids - Microwave Instruments

Vapor Pressure sensors

Measurement of Moisture & humidity over Solids – Electrical Impedance,

Infrared Instruments.

Page 209: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

4 NUCLEAR MEASUREMENT 04

Introduction

Geiger Muller tube- operation

Ionizations chamber- working principle

Semiconductor detectors- working principles

5. POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION 08

Introduction, Measurement of water purity, Gas Analysis,

Measurement of smoke and dust.

6. PNEUMATIC INSTRUMENTATION 08

Definition, Basic pneumatic elements, application of pneumatics

Power supply requirements and maintenance, pneumatic recorders

Pneumatic Controllers- Pneumatic Devices, Pneumatic Control actions

7 OPTICAL INSTRUMENTATION 06

Principle of fiber optic cable, applications

Construction of fiber optic cable, classification of fiber optic cable

8 INDUSTRIAL INNOVATIONS 05

REFERENCES

1) Principles of Industrial Instrumentation

& Control Systems Chennakesava R Alavala

(CENGAGE LEARNING)

2) Instrumentation devices and systems CS Rangan, VSV Mani,

GR Sharma

3) Measurement systems- application/design Ernest Doeblin

4) Instrumentation Engineering handbook volume 1 and 2 Liptak

5) Instrumentation hand book Considine

6) Instrumental methods of analysis William Merritt & Dean

7) Instrumental methods of chemical analysis EW Ewing’s

8) Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentation Alok Barua (Wiley)

Page 210: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engineering

Sixth Semester

Subject: IC603 Advanced Process Instrumentation

No. of hours / week: 4 No. of hours / Sem: 64

SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1 FORCE AND TORQUE MEASUREMENTS

1.1 Introduction

1.2 Basic methods of Force measurements

1.3 Description of force measuring sensors- Load cell (Strain gauge,

Proving-Ring, Piezoelectric, hydraulic, Pneumatic)

1.4 Working of Digital force transducers

1.5 Torque measurement- Definition of Torque,

1.6 Types of Torque Meters Strain gauge torque meter, digital torque

meter, and magneto-strictive transducer

2 MEASUREMENT OF SPEED, VIBRATION & ACCELERATION

2.1 Introduction

2.2 Classification of Tachometers

2.3 Tachometer- AC tachometer, DC tachometer, Stroboscopic

Tachometer (Explain with Diagram)

2.4 Vibration sensing devices- Seismic Displacement Pickups, Seismic

velocity pickup,

2.5 Accelerometer- Seismic acceleration pickup, Piezo electric, LVDT

3. MEASUREMENT OF DENSITY, HUMIDITY AND MOISTURE

3.1 Introduction

3.2 Classification of Density measuring instruments

3.3 Density measurement using - weight, buoyancy, Hydrostatic Head,

Radiation (Description with Diagram)

3.4 Classification of Moisture & Humidity Measurement Techniques

(Description with Diagram)

3.5 Measurement of Moisture & humidity in Gases – Dew point

instruments, electrical sensor instruments. (Description with Diagram)

Page 211: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

3.6 Measurement of Moisture & humidity over Liquids - Microwave

Instruments Vapor Pressure sensors (Description with Diagram)

3.7 Measurement of Moisture & humidity over Solids – Electrical

Impedance, Infrared Instruments. (Description with Diagram)

4 NUCLEAR MEASUREMENT

4.1 Introduction

4.2 Explain with diagram the working Principle and operation of

Geiger Muller tube

Ionization chamber

Semiconductor detectors

5 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION

5.1 Introduction

Importance of measurement and instrumentation in power plant

5.2 Necessity of Pure Water

5.3 Measurement of water purity using Conductivity Meter

5.4 Measurement of Dissolved Oxygen in feed water

5.5 Measurement of Ph of water using Electrometric Method

5.6 Gas Analysis - Measurement of Carbon dioxide by Thermal

Conductivity Method.

5.7 Measurement of Carbon Monoxide by infrared Absorption

5.8 Measurement of smoke by photocell meter.

5.9 Measurement of Dust by reflected Light Monitor.

6 PNEUMATIC INSTRUMENTATION

6.1 Definition, Basic pneumatic elements, application of pneumatics

6.2 Power supply requirements and maintenance, pneumatic recorders

6.3 Pneumatic Controllers:

6.3.1 Introduction to Pneumatic Devices

Baffle Nozzle Amplifier

Pilot Relays

Feed back Amplifier

Page 212: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

6.4 Pneumatic Control Actions:

Proportional (P)

Proportional plus Integral (PI)

Proportional, Integral, Derivative. (PID)

7 OPTICAL INSTRUMENTATION

7.1 Principle of fiber optic cable

Applications

7.2 Construction of fiber optic cable

7.3 classification of fiber optic cable

7.4 Fiber optic Sensors

8 INDUSTRIAL INNOVATIONS

Students must be encouraged to collect information about transducers and

instrumentation employed in Process Control Industries. Necessary

documentation may be prepared in this regard.

Page 213: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Enginering

Sixth Semester

Subject: Advanced Process Instrumentation

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Instructions

1) Section I is compulsory

2) Answer any 2 full questions from the Section II, III, IV

3) Maximum Marks: 100

SECTION I

1 a) Fill in the blanks with appropriate word(s) (1*5=5)

i) Inoperative period of time of Geiger Muller counter is called __

ii) LVDT accelerometers are used for __ frequency vibration measurements

iii) Hall-effect elements are extensively used for sensing of__

iv) Servo accelerometer is also known as__

v) pH of neutral solution is ____

b) Write short notes on digital pH meter (5)

SECTION II

2 a) Explain the working of Electronic weighing system with neat block diagram (8)

b) Explain the working of velocity transducer (5)

c) What is Accelerometer (2)

3 a) Explain torque measurement using strain gauge torque meter (8)

b) Explain the working of Digital force transducer (5)

c) What is Load cell (2)

4 a) Explain the working of speed measurement using stroboscope (8)

b) Write a short note on DC Tachometer (5)

c) What is Torque (2)

SECTION III

5 a) Explain the measurement of flux density using Hall’s probe (8)

b) What is the difference between absolute and relative humidity (5)

c) List the different methods for nuclear measurement (2)

6 a) Explain the measurement of thickness using ultrasonic transducer (8)

b) Explain the working principle of semiconductor detector (5)

c) Define density (2)

7 a) Explain the measurement of density using volume flow meter (8)

b) Write a short note on resistive hygrometer (5)

Page 214: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

c) Define humidity (2)

SECTION IV

8 a) What is a recorder. Discuss the various recorders used in pneumatic

Instrumentation. (8)

b) List the classification of fiber optic cable (5)

c) List any two application of Pneumatics (2)

9 a) Explain the thermal conductivity method of gas analysis (8)

b) Explain the principle of total internal reflection in fiber optics (5)

c) List the detectors for gas analysis (2)

10 a) Explain the principle of polarography and chromatography (8)

b) Explain the measurement of light radiation using photo transistor (5)

c) What is Pneumatics (2)

* * * * * * * * * * * * * *

Page 215: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

GOVT. OF KARNATAKA

DEPARTMENT OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION

Subject Title : Basic Management Skills &

Indian constitution

Q P Code :

Hours Per Week : 04

Hours Per Semester : 64

BASIC MANAGEMENT SKILLS & INDIAN CONSTITUTION

TOPIC ANALYSIS

SL.No Major Topics Hours

Allotted

Weightage of

Marks

SECTION-I

1 Management Skills 09 15

2 Operations Management 12 35

SECTION-II

3 Total Preventive Maintenance 04 10

4 Total Quality Management 06 20 5 Safety and Environmental issues 06 20

SECTTION-III

6 Indian Constitution 08 20 7 Parliamentary System and procedures 05 10 8 Empowerment of Women 08 15 9 Environmental Awareness and Industry

Innovations

03 -

Tests 03 -

Total 64 145

CONTENTS

1. MANAGEMENT SKILLS

1.1 INTERPERSONAL SKILLS.

1.11 Know Thyself/ self –Discovery.

1.12 Know others and understand the perspective of others.

1.13 Intergroup communications.

1.14 Art Of Communications

Page 216: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

1.2 TEAM BUILDING and TEAMWORK SKILLS.

1.21 Aspects of team building.

1.22 Team v/s Group.

1.23 Inter group collaboration.

2. OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

2.1 Production & Productivity

2.1.1 Stages involved in Product Design

2.1.2 Factors considered while designing a Product

2.1.3 Types of Production

2.1.4 Factors to improve Productivity

2.2 Production, Planning & Control

2.3 Make or Buy Decision

2.3.1 Criteria considered for make or buy decision

2.3.2 Analysis for make or buy decision

2.4 Purchasing

2.4.1 Methods of Purchasing Material or Component

2.4.2 Steps involved in purchasing of material or component

2.5 Stores Management

2.5.1 Methods of Storing

2.5.2 Tools required for Stores Management

2.5.3 Codification System

2.6 Logistics Management

2.6.1 Different means of Transportation

2.6.2 Routing & Delays, Tracing, Packaging & Material Handling,

Damage Claims, Demurrage Charges and Insurance Buying

2.7 Inventory & Inventory Control

2.7.1 Functions of Inventory Control

2.7.2 Inventory Control Techniques

2.7.3 Inventory Management Software

2.8 Introduction to MRP and ERP

3.TOTAL PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

3.1 Maintenance and concept of TPM

3.2 Economics involved in preventive maintenance

3.3 Techniques of TPM

3.4 Benefits of TPM

3.5 Planned Maintenance and Predictive Maintenance

Page 217: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

4. TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

4.1 Quality and Inspection

4.1.1 Factors affecting Quality

4.1.2 Relation between Quality & Cost

4.1.3 Quality Control

4.2 Concept of TQM

4.2.1 Tools and Techniques of TQM

4.3 Quality Management System

4.3.1 I.S.O 9000:2000 Quality Standards

4.3.2 Procedures and Documentation of ISO 9000 certification

5. SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES

5.1 Accident and Safety

5.2 Accident Prevention, Accident Reporting and Crisis Management

5.3 Safety provisions under Indian Factories Act

5.4 Safety Management System-OSHAS 18001

5.5 Environmental issues addressed by organization

6. INDIAN CONSTITUTION

6.1 Indian Constitution-Formation of Constituent Assembly-Framing of the

Constitution-Drafting Committee-Contributions of Dr. B R Ambedkar,

Chairman of Drafting Committee and the members in drafting a

constitution for India.

6.2 Preamble-objectives-Directive principles

6.3 Features of Constitution

6.4 Fundamental Rights

6.5 Fundamental duties

6.6 Amendments for Indian Constitution

6.7 Human Rights

7. PARLIAMENTARY SYSTEMS AND PROCEDURES.

7.1 Government-Meaning-organs-functions.

7.2 Parliament-meaning-Two houses-Lok Sabha-Composition-election-

Presiding officer-term-RajyaSabha- Composition-election-Presiding

officer-term

7.3 Powers of parliament

7.4 Executive Role - President-Vice President-Prime Minister-Council of

Ministers

7.5 Indian Judiciary system-Supreme Court-High Court-subordinate courts

7.6 Constitutional bodies-Election Commission-Public Service Commission-

Finance Commission

7.7 Structure of State government- State Legislature-Governor-Chief

Minister-Council of Ministers

Page 218: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

7.8 Local self government-meaning-Three tier system-Village panchayath-

taluk panchayath-Zilla panchayath

7.9 Local bodies-Municipalities and Corporations

8.0 EMPOWERMENT OF WOMEN.

8.1 Concept, Definition and need for Women's Empowerment

8.2 Strategies, approaches, process, levels, principles and indicators for

women’s empowerment.

8.3 Gender statistics in India – Glaring inequalities

8.4 Women and Development:

8.4.1 Goals and Objectives of National Policy for Women's

Empowerment

8.4.2 Advancement of Women through Five-Year Plans

8.4.3 Special Programs for Women's Development.

8.5 Constitutional Provisions towards Women's Rights and Special

Legislations for Women.

8.6 Case Studies.

SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. MANAGEMENT SKILLS

1.1 INTERPERSONAL SKILLS.

1.11.1 Importance of knowing yourself-Process of knowing yourself.

1.11.2 SWOT analysis-Benefits of SWOT analysis

1.11.3 SWOT analysis grid and questions to complete the grid.

1.12.1 Importance of knowing others-Process of knowing others.

1.13.1 Resolving Win/Lose Situations into win/win through inter group

communications.

1.14.1 Defining communication- Special features of communication.

1.14.2 Communication process- Channels of communication.

1.14.3 Formal and informal communication network.

1.14.4 Barriers to communication- Tips of effective communication.

1.14.5 Tips of powerful presentation- Art of public speaking- Importance of

public speaking- Benefits of public speaking- Public speaking tips.

1.2 TEAM WORK AND TEAMWORK

1.21.1 Meaning and aspects of team building- Skills needed for teamwork-

A model of team building.

1.22.1 Team v/s Group- Characteristics of a effective team- Role of a team

leader- Role of a team members- A successful team of nine persons.

1.23.1 Inter group collaboration- Advantages of inter group collaboration.

Page 219: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

1.23.2 Difficulties faced in inter-group collaboration.

1.23.3 Factors shaping inter group collaboration.

2. OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

2.1 Define Production & Productivity

2.1.1 Explain various stages involved in product design

2.1.2 List factors considered while designing a product

2.1.3 Explain Job, Batch & Mass production with their advantages and

disadvantages

2.1.4 List factors to improve/increase productivity

2.2 State the functions of PPC- planning, routing, scheduling, dispatching and

inspection

2.3 State the importance of make or buy decision

2.3.1 List the criteria considered for make or buy decision

2.3.2 Briefly explain methods of analysis for make or buy decision-

Simple cost analysis, Break even analysis & Economic analysis

2.4 Define purchasing

2.4.1 Explain briefly different methods of purchasing the material or

component.

2.4.2 Explain the steps involved in purchasing of Material or Component

2.5 Explain Stores Management

2.5.1 Explain different methods of storing

2.5.2 Explain briefly Bin Card, Material Issue Requisition, Material

Returned Note and Store Ledger

2.5.3 Explain advantages and systems of Codification

2.6 Explain Logistics Management

2.6.1 Explain different means of transportation

2.6.2 Explain Routing & Delays, Tracing, Packaging & Material

Handling, Damage Claims, Demurrage Charges and Insurance

Buying

2.7 Define Inventory and Inventory Control

2.7.1 List important functions of Inventory Control

2.7.2 Explain briefly Inventory Control Techniques – ABC, VED, SDE,

MNG Analysis

2.7.3 List few Inventory Management Softwares

2.8 Describe about MRP & ERP. List the software’s used

3. TOTAL PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

3.1 Explain Maintenance and explain the concept of TPM

3.2 Explain the economics involved in preventive maintenance

3.3 Describe the techniques of TPM

3.4 List the benefits of TPM

3.5 Explain planned maintenance and predictive maintenance

4. TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Page 220: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

4.1 Define Quality, Inspection & explain its importance

4.1.1 List factors affecting quality

4.1.2 Explain the relation between cost & quality

4.1.3 Define and Explain quality control

4.2 Explain concept of TQM

4.2.1 Explain briefly tools & techniques of TQM – Flow charts, Control

charts, Histograms, Pareto charts, Check sheets, Scatter diagram,

Cause and effect diagram, 5-S, Poka-yoke, Kaizen, Re-engineering

and Six-sigma

4.3 Define QMS

4.3.1 Explain briefly I.S.O 9000:2000 Quality Standards – ISO 9000, ISO

9001 & ISO 9004

4.3.2 Explain procedures and documentation involved in ISO 9000 series

certification

5. SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES

5.1 Define accident and safety

5.2 Explain accident prevention, accident reporting and crisis management

5.3 List the safety provisions under Indian Factories Act

5.4 Explain Safety Management System-OSHAS 18001

5.5 Give a brief summary of ISO 14000 series and IS16949 & IS16959

certifications

6. INDIAN COSTITUTION

6.1 Introduction to Indian Constitution

6.2 Discuss the Formation of Constituent Assembly

6.3 Discuss the Contributions of Dr. B R Ambedkar as a Chairman of Drafting

Committee and the members in drafting a constitution for India.

6.4 Discuss Preamble and its main objectives

6.5 State the Directive principles

6.6 Discuss the Features of Constitution

6.7 Mention the number of parts, articles, schedules and discuss the article -1

6.8 Discuss Fundamental Rights

6.9 Discuss Fundamental duties

6.10 Explain the Amendment and its procedure

6.11 Discuss Human Rights and its significance

7. PARLIAMENTARY SYSTEM

7.1 Discuss the Parliamentary system of Government.

7.2 Discuss the about:

7.2.1 Loka Sabha: Composition, election, Presiding officer and term

7.2.2 RajyaSabha: Composition, election, Presiding officer and term

7.3 Powers of parliament

7.3.1How law is made, three readings

Page 221: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

7.3.2Diffrence between Bill and act

7.3.3Administrative control- Explain importance of questioning- concept

of Question hour- concept of zero hour

7.3.4 Briefly explain about Confidence motion and Censure motion

7.4 Explain the meaning of the budget

7.5 President-Vice President-Prime Minister-Council of Ministers their

appointments and functions

7.6 Discuss the formation and functions of supreme court-High court-

Subordinate court.

7.7 Discuss the importance of Constitutional bodies-Election Commission-

Public Service Commission-Finance Commission

7.8 Discuss the about state legislature:

7.8.1 Legislative assembly: Composition, election, Presiding officer and

term

7.8.2 Legislative council: Composition, election, Presiding officer and

term

7.9 Governor-Chief Minister-Council of Ministers their appointments and

functions

7.10 Local self government-meaning-Three tier system

7.11 Discuss the formation and functions of Village panchayath-taluk

panchayath-Zilla panchayath and urban local bodies such as

Municipalities and Corporations

8. Empowerment of Women

8.1 Explain the Concept and Definition of Women's Empowerment.

8.2 Discuss the different strategies, approaches, process, levels, principles and

indicators for women's empowerment.

8.3 Discuss the Gender statistics in India – Glaring inequalities.

8.4 Explain Women and Development

8.4.1 List the Goals and Objectives of National Policy-2001 for

Women's Empowerment.

8.4.2 Discuss the emphasis given on the Advancement of Women

through Five-Year Plans.

8.4.3 List the Various Special Programs for Women's

Development from government.

8.5 State Constitutional Provisions towards Women's Rights -Fundamental

Rights Article 14, 15, 15(3), 16-Directive of State Policy Article 39,42-

Fundamental Duties 51(A)(e) and Reservation of seats Article 243(D)(3),

Article 243(T)(3) - explain the following Special Legislation for Women-

Dowry Prohibition Act 1961, Domestic Violence Act 2005,Sexual

Harassment at Workplace Bill 2006, Equal Remuneration Act 1976,Hindu

succession Act,1956, Prenatal diagnostic techniques (regulation and

prevention of misuse) act,1994.

8.6 Case Studies.

Page 222: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Reference Books:

1. Soft Skills- by Dr. K. Alex, S Chand & Company Ltd.

1 Total Quality Management- Prof. Dr. H D Ramachandra

2 Industrial Organization and Engineering Economics- T.R.Banga

& S C Sharma

2 Total Quality Management- S Raja Ram, M Shivashankar.

3 Industrial management and organizational behavior- K.K.Ahuja

4 Industrial management and engineering economics- O.P.khanna

5 Production and operations management-Dr .K.Aswathappa and

Dr.Sreedhar Bhatt- Himalaya publishers

6 Introduction to the Constitution of India- Dr. Durga Das Basu

7 The constitution of India - P.M.Bhakshi- Universal law

publishers

8 Our constitution-National Book Trust of India

9 Our Parliament-National Book Trust of India

10 Our Judiciary-National Book Trust of India

11 Empowerment of rural women in India-Hemalatha H.M and

Rameshwari Varma,Hema Prakashana.

12 The right to development-centre for development and human

rights-Sage Publications.

13 Industrial Engg. &Mgmt Science By- T R Banga & SC Sharma.

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

FIFTH SEMESTER

BASIC MANAGEMENT SKILLS & INDIAN CONSTITUTION

Time: 3Hrs Max marks: 100

Part-I is compulsory and Answer any two full questions from Part-II, Part-III, and

Part-IV

PART- I

1. A) Fill in the blanks with appropriate words:- 5X1=5

I) The Constitution of India came into effect on ______________.

ii) The term of the chairperson of Rajyasabha is_________ years

iii) ______________ is an unforeseen event

Page 223: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

iv) The ISO ______________ is related with Environmental management systems

v) Increased ________ leads to the benefits for both employer and employee

B) State the qualities of a good leader 5

PART-II

2 a) Explain SWOT analysis-Mention benefits of SWOT analysis 5

b) Explain special features of communication. 5

c) Explain Formal and informal communication network. 5

3 a) Explain the motivating factors 5

b) State the qualities of a good leader 5

c) Explain the process of team building 5

4 a) State the characteristics of entrepreneur 5

b) Lists the steps involved for setting up small scale/Medium scale industries

c) Define outsourcing and mention its features 5

PART-III

5 a) State the functions of Production planning and Production control 5

b) Define inventory and inventory control 5

c) State the importance of material management 5

6 a) Explain the total productive maintenance . 5

b) List the various types of preventive measures to avoid an accident 5

c) List the factors affecting quality 5

7 a) Explain the concept of Total quality management 5

b) List the various types SQC tools 5

c) State the importance of material management 5

PART-IV

8 a) What is a constitution? 5

b) Why Dr. B R Ambedkar is known as architect of Indian Constitution? 5

c) What is sovereignty? 5

9 a) Why is there a need to Economic, social and political justice in India? 5

b) Explain three tier panchayath system 5

Page 224: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

c) Mention the salient features of Indian constitution. 5

10 a) what are the approaches to empowerment of women? 5

b) List the goals and objectives of national policy for women's empowerment.5

c) Write a note on dowry prohibition act. 5

Question Bank on Indian Constitution

1. What is a government?

2. What is a constitution?

3. Why constitution is called the rule of the State?

4. Write the importance of the constitution.

5. To draft a constitution to India was the most challenging task. Why?

6. What are the contributions of Dr. B R Ambedkar in drafting a constitution for

India?

7. What is the importance of republic day?

8. What is the importance of preamble?

9. Why is preamble said to be the soul of the constitution?

10. What is sovereignty?

11. What is the objective of Socialism?

12. The principle of Secularism is suitable to India. How?

13. Why is India called republic?

14. Why is there a need to Economic, social and political justice in India?

15. Mention the aspects which strengthen the bond of fraternity in India?

16. In the present context unity and integrity are most essential in India. Why?

17. Though Directive principles are not enforceable by law they are important in the

constitution. How?

18. Mention the salient features of Indian constitution.

19. How is written constitution, advantageous than unwritten constitution?

20. Indian constitution is one of the lengthiest constitution. Mention the factors to

substantiate the statement.

21. State the notable features borrowed from the following constitutions: a) U. S. A.

b) England c) Ireland d) Canada.

22. Why is Indian constitution termed as flexible constitution?

23. What is universal Adult Franchise?

24. Write the advantages of single citizenship.

25. Why is Indian judiciary said to be an independent judiciary?

25. What is the importance of Fundamental rights?

27. How can it be said that Fundamental rights are not absolute?

28. Mention the Fundamental rights.

29. Give reasons as to why certain sections of the society are provided concessions

and privileges in spite of right to equality.

30. How does cultural and educational right protect the interests of the minorities?

Page 225: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

31. Mention the right introduced in 2010 under right to equality what is the

importance of it?

32. Name the right that bans child labour and provides protection to women against

exploitation.

33. The right to Constitutional remedies is said to be the heart and soul of our

constitution. Why is it said so?

34. Rights and Duties are like the two sides of the same coin - Substantiate the

statement.

35. Mention a few fundamental duties that you have to follow as a citizen of this

country.

36. When and in which the fundamental duties part of the constitution was

incorporated?

37. Name the body that has powers to amend the provisions of the constitution in

India.

38. What is the procedure followed in parliament to amend the provisions of

Fundamental rights and Directive principles?

39. Write the procedures to be followed to amend the constitutional provisions.

Page 226: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engineering

Sixth Semester

Subject IC 605: Bio Medical Lab

Contact Hours / week: 6 Contact hours / Sem: 96 hours

General Objectives

After the completion of the lab student must be able to

1) Draw the electronic circuits used in Bio-medical lab

2) Analyze the circuits and verify the readings and record the waveforms

3) Test the above circuits for their performance

4) Familiarize with the range, specifications, manuals of Bio-medical equipments

5) Familiarize with the measurement of Bio-electrical parameters Study Exercises No of Hrs

Part A

Laboratory exercises

1) Construct and testing of Low pass and High pass filter using OP Amp 06

2) Construct and testing of Instrumentation amplifier using OP Amp 06

3) Measurement lung volume using Spiro meter 06

4) Construct and test Sample and Hold circuit using Op Amp 06

5) Measurement of Blood pressure using Sphygmomanometer 06

6) Measurement of Blood pressure using Electronic BP Meter 06

7) Detection of Blood Group 06

8) Recording the Electrical parameters of Heart using ECG 06

9) Measurement of Body Temperature using Clinical Thermometer 06

Part B

Demonstrate/explain the working of the following medical instruments

1) EEG, EMG 06

2) Muscle simulator, Bedside monitor 06

3) Ultrasound Doppler Blood Flow Meter 06

4) Ophthalmoscope 06

5) X-ray 06

6) MRI 06

7) Tests and Assignments 06

Total 96

Page 227: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Scheme of Valuation

Sl

no. Particulars Marks

1 Lab record 05

2 Writing circuit diagram, Tabular column , calculations- part A 10

3 Construction and conduction 35

4 Writing procedure and demonstration of any one instrument (Part B) 20

4 Result 10

5 Viva voce 20

Total 100

Page 228: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engineering

Sixth Semester

Subject IC 602: Computer in Process Control

No. of hours/week: 4 No. of hours / Sem: 64

Sl No. CONTENTS No. of hours Marks

1 Introduction to Process control 04 10

2 Final Control Element 10 25

3 Fundamentals of Process Controllers 10 25

4 Building blocks of automation system 10 25

5 SCADA 05 15

6 Distributed control system 10 25

7 Robotics 06 20

8 Industrial Innovations 05 ---

9 Tests & Assignments 04 ---

TOTAL 64 145

Scheme of Studies

Chapter

No Particulars No of Hrs

Section I

1 Fill in the Blanks short notes from Ch-1

Section II

1 Introduction to Process Control 04

2 Final control element 10

5 S C A D A 05

Section III

3 Fundamentals of Process controllers 10

6 Distributed control system 08

Section IV

4 Building blocks of automation system 10

6 Distributed control system 02

7 Robotics 06

Page 229: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Contact Hrs/week: 4Hrs Contact Hrs / Sem: 64Hrs

General objectives:

1. Know the current trends with computer control in process plant.

2. Know the working of final control elements in process control .

3. Understand the fundamentals of process controllers.

4. Study the building blocks of Automation system.

5. Study the importance of S C A D A in process control.

6. Understand the concepts of distributed control system.

7. Study the applications of Robot

CONTENTS No of Hrs

1. INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS CONTROL 04

Current trends in computer control in process plant

Centralized computer control system

Distributed control system

Total plant Hierarchical control system

2. FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT 10

Final control element in process control loop

Actuator and control valve example in control loop of water heating system

Final control operation- signal conversion, actuator, control element

Signal conversion- Analog (relay/ amplifier), Digital (DAC),

Pneumatic Actuator –pneumatic Actuator for converting pressure signals into

mechanical shaft motion.

Electrical actuator-solenoid, DC motor, AC motor

Hydraulic actuator- Hydraulic servo

3. FUNDAMENTALS OF PROCESS CONTROLLERS 10

Define Process load, process lag, self regulation

Controller system parameters- error, variable range, control lag, dead time

Discontinuous controller modes- two position mode, multi position mode and

its applications

Continuous controller modes- Proportional, Integral, Derivative mode and its

applications

Composite controller modes-PD,PI, PID controller and applications

Multivariable control- cascade control and ratio control

Feed forward control, adaptive controllers, fuzzy logic system

4. BUILDING BLOCKS OF AUTOMATION SYSTEM 10

Pentium processor-4 features

Data transfer schemes- Asynchronous, Synchronous, Interrupt driven, DMA

Communication hierarchy model for industrial automation

Network data communication-analog, digital, Hybrid

OSI layer model. Process control network- functions, General characteristics-

address, data packets, physical media, speed, cycle time

Bus standards- GPIB IEEE 488, HART protocol, field bus.

Page 230: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

5. S C A D A 05

Introduction

S C A D A block diagram and description

Distributed S C A D A system- Star configuration, Daisy chain configuration

Remote terminal unit- I/O modules, Communication modules, special

software facilities.

6. DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM 10

Concept of Decentralized computer control

Comparison between distributed and centralized

Advantages of Distributed control system

Functional requirements of DCS

Hierarchy of DCS

Block diagram explanation of Thermal power plant Automation system

7. ROBOTICS 06

Introduction

Application of Robots, Degree of freedom, configuration of robot

Technical features of robot, components of a robot

Robot sensors- Tactile sensor- touch sensor, force sensor, Proximity sensor,

Vision sensor, voice sensor

8 INDUSTRIAL INNOVATIONS 05

REFERENCES

1) Computer Based Industrial control Krishna Kant, PHI

2) Process Control Instrumentation Technology Curtis D Johnson, PHI

3) PC based Instrumentation- concepts/practice N Mathivanan, PHI

4) Modern Control Engineering Katsuhiko Ogata, PHI

5) Mechatronics, CAD, CAM and Robotics BA Srinivas

6) Advanced Microprocessors K. Shashidhar, Sapna

Publications

7) Instrumentation for Engg Measurements J W Dally, W F Riley

K G McConnell (Wiley)

Page 231: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Engineering

Sixth Semester

Subject: IC 602 Computer in Process control

No. of hours / week: 4 No. of hours / Sem: 64

SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

1. INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS CONTROL

1.1 Current trends in computer control in process plant

1.2 Centralized computer control system

1.3 Distributed control system

1.4 Hierarchical control system

2. FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT

2.1 Final control element in process control loop

2.2 Actuator and control valve example in control loop of water heating

system

2.3 Final control operation-

2.3.1 Signal conversion,

2.3.2 Actuator,

2.3.3 Control element

2.4 Signal conversion-

Analog (relay/ amplifier)

Digital (DAC)

Electrical actuator-solenoid,

DC motor,

AC motor.

2.5 Pneumatic actuator-pneumatic actuator for converting pressure signal

into mechanical shaft motion.

2.6 Hydraulic actuator- Hydraulic servo

Page 232: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

3. FUNDAMENTALS OF PROCESS CONTROLLERS

3.1 Define Process load, process lag, self regulation

3.2 Controller system parameters- error, variable range, control lag, dead

time

3.3 Discontinuous controller modes-

Two position mode,

Multi position mode and its applications

3.4 Continuous controller modes-

Proportional,

Integral,

Derivative mode and their applications

3.5 Composite controller modes-

PD,

PI,

PID controllers and their applications

3.6 Multivariable control-

3.6.1 Cascade control and

3.6.2 Ratio control

3.7 Feed forward control

3.8 Adaptive controllers,

3.9 Fuzzy logic system

4. BUILDING BLOCKS OF AUTOMATION SYSTEM

4.1 Pentium processor-4. features.

4.2 Data transfer schemes- Asynchronous, Synchronous, Interrupt driven,

DMA

4.2 Communication hierarchy model for industrial automation

4.3 Network data communication-

Analog,

Digital

Hybrid

Page 233: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

4.4 OSI 7 layer model

4.5 Process control network- Functions of the network

4.6. General characteristics- address,

Data packets,

Physical media,

Speed,

Cycle time

4.6 Definition, features and Applications of

GPIB (IEEE 488)

HART protocol, 4.6.1Field bus-field bus classes

55. SCADA

5.1 Introduction

5.2 SCADA block diagram and description

5.3 Distributed SCADA system-

5.3.1 Star configuration,

5.3.2 Daisy chain configuration

5.3.3 Remote Terminal unit- I/o modules,

5.4 Communication modules, special software facilities

6. DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM

6.1 Concept of Decentralized computer control

6.2 Comparison between distributed and centralized

6.3 Advantages of Distributed control system

6.4 Functional requirements of DCS

Role of plant operator

Maintenance Engg,

Design and development engg,

Manager and Supervisor

6.5 Hierarchy of DCS-Block diagram explanation

6.6 Block diagram explanation of Thermal power plant Automation

System.

Page 234: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

7. ROBOTICS

7.1 Introduction

7.2 Application of Robots

7.2.1 Degree of freedom,

7.2.2 Configuration of robot

7.3 Technical features of robot

7.3.1 Components of a robot

7.4 Robot sensors-

Tactile sensor-

Touch sensor,

Force sensor,

Proximity sensor,

Vision sensor,

Voice sensor

8 INDUSTRIAL INNOVATIONS

Students must be encouraged to collect data of various Process Control Systems.

Also information on Building block of Automation System, SCADA,

ROBOTICS and different types of Controllers is to be made. Necessary

documentation has to be done in this regard.

Page 235: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma Course in Electronic Instrumentation & Control Enginering

Sixth Semester

Subject: Computer in Process Control

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

Instructions

1. Section I is compulsory

2. Answer any 2 full questions from the Section II, III, IV

3. Maximum Marks: 100

SECTION I

1 a) Fill in the blanks with appropriate word(s) (1*5=5)

i) __ reduces the offset when added to proportional control system

ii) SCADA stands for ____

iii) The electrical actuation is an example of ___

iv) DCS stands for __

v) __ are the part of control system which helps the Robot to work like human arms

b) Explain the total plant Hierarchical control system. (5)

SECTION II

2 a) Explain the working of SCADA with neat block diagram (8)

b) Explain the pneumatic actuator for converting pressure signal into mechanical

shaft motion. (5)

c) Define Actuators? (2)

3 a) Explain the working of dc and ac motor as electrical actuators (8)

b) With neat diagram explain Actuator and control valve in control loop of

water heating system (5)

c) Write the block diagram of centralized computer system (2)

4 a) Explain in detail distributed SCADA system (8)

b) Write a short note on hydraulic actuators (5)

c) What is a solenoid (2)

SECTION III

5 a) Explain with diagram Multivariable control (8)

b) Draw the block diagram of a Thermal power plant automation system (5)

c) List the applications of two position mode controller (2)

6 a) Explain the working of a PID controller (8)

b) Explain the role of a supervisor in process control system (5)

c) What is Dead time (2)

7 a) Explain the functional requirements of DCS (8)

Page 236: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

b) Write a short note Fuzzy logic system (5)

c) What is process lag (2)

SECTION IV

8 a) Define field bus and explain with figure field bus classes (8)

b) List the important features of a Pentium 4 system (5)

c) What is Robot? (2)

9 a) Explain Robot sensors (8)

b) Explain in detail the technical features of a robot (5)

c) What is GPIB? (2)

10 a) Compare digital and hybrid network data communication protocols (8)

b) Compare distributed and centralized system of process control (5)

c) List the applications of a Robot (2)

* * * * * * * * * * * * * *

Page 237: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engineering

Sixth Semester

Subject IC 604: Industrial Electronics Lab

Contact Hours / week: 6 Contact hours / Sem: 96 hours

General Objectives

After the completion of the lab student must be able to

1) Know the characteristics and applications of SCR,DIAC and TRIAC

2) Understand circuits and equipments used for control of temperature, level

3) Understand electronic speed control of motors and voltage regulation

4) Know the operation of relay and timers

5) Know the operation of PLC simulator No of Hrs

Part A

Construct and conduct the following experiments

1) To test and plot the VI characteristics of SCR, DIAC, TRIAC 12

2) To construct and test UJT relaxation oscillator 03

3) Plot VI characteristics of IGBT 03

4) Construction & test rectification characteristic of SCR

AC/DC gate control 06

5) Construct and test light dimmer circuit using DIAC 03

6) Construct & test half wave controlled circuit using RC triggering circuit 06

7) Construct & test Full wave controlled circuit using RC triggering circuit 06

8) Construct and test RC firing circuit of SCR 03

9) Opto-coupler – its application as an SSR 06

10) Study speed control circuit of DC motor 06

11) Construct and study simple timers using ICs and SCR 06

12) Construct and study Burglar alarm 06

13) To construct and study temperature controller using TRIAC 06

14) To construct and study TRIAC lamp dimmer 03

15) To construct and study SCR used as DC circuit breaker 03

Test & Assignment 06

Page 238: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

PART B Study Exercises

To Study

a) Proximity switch 03

b) Fire Alarm 03

c) Smoke Detector 03

d) Study of sequence control circuits 03

Scheme of Valuation

Sl

no. Particulars Marks

1 Lab record 05

2 Writing Study Exercise from Part B 10

3 Writing circuit diagram, Tabular column & waveform , calculations

(Part A) 25

4 Construction and conduction 30

5 Result 10

6 Viva voce 20

Total 100

Reference Books

1) S C R Manual – G E Company

2) Power Electronics – R S Ramshaw

3) Thyristors and Applications – M Ramamurthy

4) Industrial Electronics Test Lab Manual – Paul B Zbar

Page 239: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

Government of Karnataka

Department of Technical Education

Diploma course in Electronic Instrumentation and Control Engineering

Sixth semester

Subject: IC 606 Project work

Contact Hours / week: 3 Contact hours / Sem: 48 hours

General Objectives

Details of contents

The Project gives an opportunity to apply all his / her knowledge and skills acquired

throughout his / her study. The finished project will show the students skill in the

fabrication of the circuit. Hence the student should employ his / her ingenuity to reflect

his / her own desire and requirement. The project will make the student confident of his /

her ability to apply his / her skills in constructing the circuit or equipment of which

he /she can be proud of

1. A practical project needs to be taken. The steps involved in the project work are

1. Identification of the project

2. Problem definition

3. Gathering information / data needed for the project

4. Selection of best solutions

5. Selection and collection of suitable material

6. Planning and fabrication

7. Testing

8. Preparing a detailed project report

2. The project report should have the following features

1. Introduction

2. Name and feature of the project

3. Block diagram of the project

4. Circuit diagram and its brief description

5. Flow chart

6. Components layout

7. Printed circuit pattern or layout diagram of the circuit

8. Front panel and cabinet drawing

9. Components list

10. Cost estimation of the project

11. Power supply

12. Testing points and waveforms if any

13. Operation and maintenance procedure

14. Suggestions for improvement if any

15. Electrical safety information

16. Conclusion

Page 240: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

3. The internal and final evaluation marks have to be awarded on the basis of the

above features along with viva-voce at the end

4. Students may be advised to do the projects in the following related areas

1. Project based on Process control Instrumentation

2. Project based on Microcontrollers

3. Project based on Programmable Logic controllers

4. Project based on Bio-medical field

5. Project based on Environmental Instrumentation

6. Project based on Computer controlled process Instrumentation

7. Project based on Industrial Electronics equipments

8 Project based on Industrial Automation

Note: - The respective institutes can arrange number of industrial visits to facilitate and

gain knowledge for the students

The students are to be closely monitored to avoid purchasing the project directly.

__________________________________________________

GUIDELINES FOR THE PREPARATION OF PROJECT REPORTS

1. Project reports should be typed neatly in Times New Roman letters with font size 14 for

titles and 12 for text on both sides of the paper with 1.5 line spacing on a A4 size paper

(210 x 297 mm). The margins should be:

Left - 1.5", Right - 1", Top and Bottom - 0.75".

2. The total number of reports (Soft bound) to be prepared are

One copy to the department /library

One copy to the concerned guide(s)

One copy to the candidate.

3. Before taking the final printout, the approval of the concerned guide(s) is mandatory and

suggested corrections, if any, must be incorporated.

4. Every copy of the report must contain

Inner title page (White)

Outer title page with a plastic cover

Candidate declaration and Certificate in the format enclosed both from the

institution and the organization where the project is carried out.

An abstract (synopsis) not exceeding 100 words, indicating salient features of the

work.

Page 241: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

5. The organization of the report should be as follows

1. Inner title page

2. Abstract or Synopsis

3. Acknowledgments

4. Table of Contents

5. List of table & figures (optional)

Usually numbered in

roman

CANDIDATE’S DECLARATION

I, ------------------------------------------ the student of Diploma in ------------------------------

Department bearing Reg No---------------------------------------of -------------------------------

--------------- hereby declare that I own full responsibility for the information, results and

conclusions provided in this project work titled “-------------------------------------------------

---------------------------------- “submitted to Board of Technical Examinations,

Government of Karnataka for the award of Diploma in -----------------------------------.

To the best of my knowledge, this project work has not been submitted in part or full

elsewhere in any other institution/organization for the award of any

certificate/diploma/degree. I have completely taken care in acknowledging the

contribution of others in this academic work. I further declare that in case of any violation

of intellectual property rights and particulars declared, found at any stage, I, as the

candidate will be solely responsible for the same.

Date:

Place:

Signature of candidate

Name: --------------------

Reg No-------------------

Page 242: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

DEPARTMENT OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION

NAME OF THE INSTITUTION

Address with pin code

Department of ……………………………………………………..

CERTIFICATE

Certified that this project report entitled -----------------------------------------------------------

---------

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------”which is being

submitted by Mr./Ms. ………………………….……………….., Reg. No…..……………, a

bonafide student of …………………………………….in partial fulfillment for the award of

Diploma in -----------------Engineering during the year ……………………... is record of

students own work carried out under my/our guidance. It is certified that all

corrections/suggestions indicated for internal Assessment have been incorporated in the Report

and one copy of it being deposited in the polytechnic library.

The project report has been approved as it satisfies the academic requirements in respect of

Project work prescribed for the said diploma.

It is further understood that by this certificate the undersigned do not endorse or approve

any statement made, opinion expressed or conclusion drawn there in but approve the

project only for the purpose for which it is submitted.

Guide(s)

Name and signature

Examiners

1

2

Head of Department

Dept. of --------------------

PROJECT EVALUATION:

Page 243: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

1. Relevance of the subject in the present context 10 mark

2. Literature Review 10 mark

3. Fabrication of the model/Data collection/repair and

Overhauling work 40 mark

4. Results & Discussion 10 mark

5. Industrial visit report 10 mark

6. Presentation 20 mark

TOTAL 100 mark

I A MARKS EVALUATION:

1. First review (During the end of V Th

semester) 25 mark

2. Second review (During the end of VI Th

semester) 25 mark

TOTAL 50 mark

I A Marks:

Scheme of Evaluation

1 Log record 05

2 Synopsis & Report 10

3 Presentation 10

Total 25

NOTE: 1. I A marks to be awarded at the end of EACH SEMESTER.

2.The candidate declaration and certificate sample copy are enclosed here for

incorporation in final project report

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

------------

ROADMAP FOR PROJECT GUIDES

1. The project work is proposed to be carried out during the V and VI semesters so

that learners prepare during the V semester, do some field work based on the

Page 244: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

preparation during the mid semester vacation and report the analysis and

inferences during the VI semester.

2. The learners would reach a level of maturity by the time they reach V semester

and so a meaningful project lasting for a year can be executed by them.

3. To execute the project with involvement needs constant guidance and monitoring

of the progress of the learners by the guide.

4. This does not mean teacher has to advice learners.

5. Be confident about the ability of the learner and “intellectually provoke” them

with challenging questions. These questions should prompt the learners to search

information and update themselves (to be carried out during the first two weeks).

6. Do not feed information to learners. Instead crate a „cognitive dissonance‟ (a

challenging question or situation that the learner is not able to find an immediate

answer but feels the need to search for information to find a solution).

7. Defer judgement on learners and give them identified sources if required like a

journal article, book or a web site.

8. Even if the learners report their inability to solve do NOT give or prescribe a

solution.

9. Be patient and give time for the learner to construct his knowledge.

10. Give corrective feedback to the learner by challenging his solutions so that his

logic is questioned and it develops further.

11. This leads to the first activity viz., literature survey and conceiving a project.

12. During this phase meet the project team in a group and create a healthy

competition among the learners to search different sources and synthesise their

findings in the group.

13. Aim for bringing out a workable innovative project conceived within the first

eight weeks as given in the schedule attached.

14. During these two phases and the third phase the teacher should assess the

strengths and weakness of the members of the group and allocate differential

work to team members on the remaining tasks to be carried out during the next

thirty weeks.

15. This is to ensure active participation of all the members of the team.

16. By the end of the twelfth week finalise the project and a schedule of further

activities for each member indicating the time frame in which his activities are to

be executed may be made ready. A soft copy of this schedule may be collected

from each learner by the guide to follow up.

17. This schedule prepared by each learner need to be documented for checking

further progress of the project.

18. The next few phases of the project may require active guidance of the guide

especially regarding the sources of collecting data, if a sample data is to be

collected the number of units has to be decided, collating the data/fabricating,

Page 245: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

tryout/analysis and finally coming out with meaningful conclusions or models or

application.

19. Data like models, designs, technical specifications, source code, protocols and

original records need be collected from one authentic source as there will not be

any variation. The teacher may guide the learners to authentic source.

20. Data having limited variability like product/service quality, processes and

standards, procedures need to be collected from a sample as there is a variation.

The number of units from whom (source) the data is to be collected is called

sample. The sample needs to be representative of the expected variation. The

decision on the size of the sample and the number of units need guidance from the

teacher. For example, data regarding the quality of a product/service need be

collected from 3 to 5 personnel at different levels of a service provider or dealers

of a product. The numbers given are suggestive but a guide based on his

experience has to make valid suggestions.

21. Data having a wide range of variation like customer satisfaction where the

customers are members of the public need a larger number of units to

accommodate the diversity. A tool like questionnaire with predetermined

questions need to be prepared, tried out on a small sample and finalise the

questions. Data may be collected from at least 30 units. This number is

suggested to apply statistical analysis for meaningful conclusions. Guides may

decide on the sample size depending on the accessibility of data.

22. The intention of the above three points viz., 19, 20 and 21 is to ensure objectivity

in data collection i.e., to reduce the subjectivity of the human mind.

23. All the above activities need to be completed before three to four weeks before

the end of V semester (refer the spread sheet related to scheduling).

24. The learners may be instructed to collect data objectively with identified sample

during the next 4 to six weeks which includes the mid semester holidays. This

would enable the learners to visit the field and collect data without the constraint

of reporting to institution and attending classes on a regular basis.

25. The collected data need to be organised and entered to spread sheets or similar

formats for analysis. Qualitative data may be converted to quantitative using a

rating scale or similar data organisation procedures.

26. The result of most analysis on spreadsheet could be obtained in tables or graphs as

per the requirement.

27. Activities mentioned in points 24, 25 and 26 may be carried out by learners

during 4 to 8 weeks after commencement of VI semester.

28. Interpretation of the analysed tables and graphs to arrive at meaningful inference.

The guide at this stage may defer his ideas on interpretation allowing the learners

to do this. In case the learners err in the process they may be given corrective

feedback.

Page 246: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

29. A report of the whole process of doing the project may be written, word processed

and submitted in triplicate.

30. Guides may contact industries and try to solve their problems so that the learners

get a field experience and they get ready for the industry.

31. Innovations and innovative practices may be encouraged among the learners to be

pursued as a project. Developing prototypes, (in simulation or real) trying out

feasibility of new ideas, changing existing systems by adding modules,

combining, assembling new modules and developing new systems may be given

higher priority over routine bookish projects.

32. The schedule of events proposed is for an investigative project as a model.

Guides may alter the prescribed schedule to suit the kind of innovative projects

sited in point No.31 above.

33. Industry personnel may be involved in conceiving, executing and evaluating

projects. This gives credibility to the institute and acceptance of learners for

absorption into the company.

GUIDELINES TO LEARNERS TO CARRY OUT A TWO

SEMESTER PROJECT

1. Carry out the project work through the V and VI semesters. Preparation must be

done during the V semester and based on this, field work should be done during

the mid semester vacation and reporting of analysis and inferences should be done

in the VI semester.

2. You have the ability and the level of maturity needed to conceive an innovative

and meaningful project accomplishing which gives you recognition by the

industry and empowers you with the power of knowledge.

3. Understand your strength and weakness and make an effort to find the strength

and weakness of other peers in the team.

4. Complement each other‟s strength rather than compete with peers within the

team. This will enable you to complete a comprehensive and innovative project

relevant to the industrial needs rather than doing a routine copy of what others

have done.

5. Seek guidance from the teacher and update him/her about the progress.

6. Be confident about your ability and that of other members of your group. Take

extra efforts to collect information, share with your peers and synthesise your

knowledge.

7. Question everything including the ideas of your teacher. Accept the ideas and

instructions which are internally consistent (logical).

8. Involve actively in group activities and contribute towards the tasks.

Page 247: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

9. Do not depend too much on the teacher as a source of information, search on your

own and build your knowledge structure. Search for authentic sources like

journal articles, books and authentic sites rather than blogs and tweets.

10. Though brief, record your thoughts and activities including searches immediately.

11. Prepare a schedule for your work on a spread sheet and encourage your peers to

do the same.

12. Show your schedule and that of others to the teacher and get his feedback.

13. Keep reviewing the schedule every fortnight and take corrective steps if needed.

For doing this keep the general guideline schedule given in the curriculum as a

backdrop.

14. Tools used for data collection like instruments, testing machines, questions to be

asked and software may be tried out and standardised by the twelfth week of the

project. Seek the teacher‟s help who is experienced in doing this.

15. Collect data dispassionately or objectively (without applying your personal

prejudice). Complete this task before the VI semester begins.

16. While entering data into the spread sheet ask your peer member to verify. This

will ensure accuracy of data entry.

17. Use appropriate mathematics/statistics for calculations. Seek help from external

sources (other than your teacher) if required.

18. The results of your analysis need to be graphically represented and documented.

You may also add photographs and video clips to increase the validity.

19. This task needs to be completed within 8 weeks after commencement of VI

semester.

20. Interpret the data (after analysis) and arrive at meaningful inferences on your

own in discussion with your peers. Get it ratified by your teacher. Suggestions

from the teacher may be discussed among your peers and incorporated if they are

internally consistent.

21. The project report may be word processed (videos, photographs attached in soft

copy) and submitted in triplicate two weeks before the end of VI semester.

22. Involve passionately in the team work, make constructive contributions and come

out with an industry friendly project which will equip you in your professional

development.

Page 248: Diploma in ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL … Syllabus 2009/IT.pdfDigital Electronics & Applications 4 ---- 4 3 100 35 25 125 45 ... Water Level Controller 02 c) Conveyer Controller

TASKS RESOURCE NEEDED

I

FORT

NIGH

T

II

FORT

NIGH

T

III

FORT

NIGH

T

IV

FORT

NIGH

T

V

FORT

NIGH

T

VI

FORT

NIGH

T

VII

FORT

NIGH

T

VIII

FORT

NIGH

T

VACA

TION

IX

FORT

NIGH

T

X

FORT

NIGH

T

XI

FORT

NIGH

T

XII

FORT

NIGH

T

XIII

FORT

NIGH

T

XIV

FORT

NIGH

T

XV

FORT

NIGH

T

XVI

FORT

NIGH

T

Literature survey for project

Internet / library /

industry / Research

Centres

Finalisation of the Area in which

the project has to be done (

Example : Design / Manufacturing

/ Thermal Engineering )Internet / library /

industry

Finding out Facility to do the

project

Laboratory /

Industry/ Project

Sites

Collecting Data / Doing

experiments / writing of code

Laboratory /

Industry/ Project

Sites

Analysis of Data Using relevent

software

Results and Fine tuning the

experiment using the Data

Analysis

Laboratory /

Industry/ Project

Sites

Report writing

Submission of Project Report and

Viva voce

PROJECT WORK - SCHEDULING


Recommended